Tải bản đầy đủ (.doc) (207 trang)

GIAO AN ANH 6 TUAN 3

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1.06 MB, 207 trang )

<span class='text_page_counter'>(1)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=1>

LESSON PLAN - ENGLISH 6



The first semester



WEEK 1:



Teaching date: 23/ 8 / 2010.



Period 1.



Ôn tập



và hớng dẫn phơng pháp học môn


Tiếng Anh 6



Introduction


<b>A. The aims and Objectives:</b>



- Hepl Ss have general knowledge of a new subject and know how to study
EL 6. Ss know the contents of the “ Tieng Anh 6”.


- By the end of this lesson, Ss will able to understand Sth about EL,know
how to learn English effectively, know the content of “Tieng Anh 6”.


<b> * Knowledge:</b>


To present the subject, student book, homework book, the way how to
learn English


<b> * Skill:</b>



Speaking, listening .

<b>B. Teaching procedure:</b>



<b> I/ Preparation:</b>


- Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters,text book, work book.
- Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.


<b> </b> <b>II. Checking:</b> -Not check

<b> C/ New lesson:</b>



<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Sơ lược về môn Tiếng Anh và SGK</b>(10ms<b>)</b>
How many units are there in English book?
Presents how many lessons in each unit
EL là ngôn ngữ phổ biến nhất trên Tg hiện
nay…


<b>2.Cấu trúc SGK Tiếng Anh 6(10ms)</b>


- T asks Ss to open their books.


There are 16 units
From 5 to 6 lessons
Repeat in chorus


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(2)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=2>

T introduces the strucsture of the “Tieng Anh 6”.
- Sách gồm 16 đơn vị bài học (16 unit)



Mỗi bài gồm 2-3 phần(A-B-C).


3.Giới thiệu cách học môn Tiếng Anh:


- T introduces to Ss some ways of learning EL.
* <b>Present the class statements(10ms) </b>


-Teacher statements:
+ Stand up, please


+ Go to the board, please
+ Come back your seat, please.
+ Write down, please


+ Hand up, please
+ Keep silent, please


+ Repeat/ again Listen and repeat
+ Give me some examples


+ Learn by heart vocabulary
+ Answer the questions


 <b>Gives the class regulations:(5ms)</b>
(By Vietnamese)


Asks the students to rebuild the class
regulations


Do following teacher


statements


- Listen and give ideas.
- Take notes( Ss discuss


in pairs to decide some
best ways of learning
El.)


- Listen and copy down


- Copy down on the
notebook


<b>III. Consolidation:(5)</b>


Asks them to learn by heart the class|<sub> statements</sub>
<b>IV. Homework:(3ms)</b>


- Learn by heart all old structures grammar
- Preparing new lesson : Unit 1 (A1-4)


WEEK 1:



Teaching date: 24/ 8 / 2010.



Period 2.


Unit 1: Greetings


Lesson 1: A1-4




<b>A/The aims and Objectives:</b>


- By the end of this lesson, ss are able to use “Hi, Hello”, “I’m / My name’s …,


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(3)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=3>

themselves correctly and fluently. Threy use numbers from 0 to 5 to count.


* Knowledge:


<b>To present: - Hello/ Hi / I am ..../ My name is...to introduce yourself</b>
<b> -Number 0-5</b>


* Skill: - Develop 4 skills: L,S R,&W.


<b>B/Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I/ Organization: </b>
- Greeting(1m)
- Check attendance
<b> II/ Preparation:</b>


- Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters.
- Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks.


<b> </b> <b>III/ Checking:</b> -Not check


<b> </b>


<b> C/ New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>



<b>1.Presentation1 (10ms)</b>
<b>+ Pre teach: (vocabulary)</b>


- T. Elicits vocabulary


- Present these vocabulary:


Hello: Xin chµo (Translation)
Hi: Xin chµo(Translation)
Name: Tªn(Translation)
Is/ Am: Lµ(Translation)
I: tơi, tớ, mình(Translation)


+Checking: R.O.R


+Dialogue build:T sét the scene: Lan í talking to
Nga,Ba is talking to Nam.


-T elicits the dialogue.
a.Lan: Hi, I am Lan
Nga: Hi, I am Nga


b.Ba: Hello, My name is Ba
Nam: Hello, My name is Nam
- T asks Ss to fill in the blank.


- T Helps Ss practice dialogue in pairs


<b>2. Presentation (15ms)A2,4(11)</b>



- T asks Ss to work in groups of 4, Ss greet &
introduce themselves. T checks some pairs.
* Presentation 2:


1.Vocabulary:


+ Pre teach: Present number 0-5:


- Oh: 0/ - One:1


Listen and repeat in chorus and
individually


Copy down


SS play a game – work in pair


Ss work in pair to introduce yourself for
example:


Hi, I am Lan


SS listen and repeat in chorus and
individually


And then copy down on their notebooks
-SS work in group: A-B


-Each group has 6 students



Write the letter on their notebook in
teacher|<sub>s order.</sub>


 Keys:
+ Hi.I’m <b>Lan</b>


+ Hello.My name’s <b>Ba</b>


<b>Quang Ninh</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(4)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=4>

- Two:2/ - Three: 3
- Four: 4/ - Five: 5
+Checking: Slap the board.


<b>3.Practice:(15)</b>


+Dictation:T reads: Oh- Five- One- Two- Four….
+Words cue drill:


Use some words cue to write telephone numbers
And make a dialogue:


<b> T: Quang Ninh, please.</b>
<b> S: Oh- Three- Three</b>


-T asks –Students anwer in chorus
-Calls some pairs to act out.


<b> </b>





<b>III.Consolidation:(3ms)</b>


- Retell briefly the ways of greeting and introducing oneself &numbers from 0 to 5.
Guessing game: uses the words cue drill cards-Students guess the numbers
He says Yes/No


S1: Oh- Three- Three
S2: No


S3: Oh-Five- One-One
S2: Yes


<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>


+ Leart by heart vocabulary and cardinal numbers
+ Do exercises 1,2 page 4(Homework book)


WEEK 1:



Teaching date: 25/ 8 / 2010.



Period 3.


Unit 1: Greetings



Lesson 2: A5-8




<b>A.The aims and Objectives:</b>


- By the end of this lesson, ss are able to use “How are you?- I’m fine,thanks” to greet
fluently, Ss can count & write from 6 to 10 correctly and quickly.


(Ask and answer the question: How are you? And the anwer : Iam fine, thanks
Number from 6 to 10.)


<b>*Knowledge</b>:<b>To present: - How are you? “I am five, thanhs”to greet each other</b>
<b> -Number 6-10</b>


<b>*Skill:</b> Develop 4 skills.


<i><b>Hai Phong</b></i>


<b>031</b>
<b>Quang Tri </b>


<b>053</b> <b><sub>Da Nang </sub></b>


<b> </b>
<b> </b>
<b>0511</b>
<b>Ha Noi </b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(5)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=5>

<b>B/Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I/ Organization: (1m) – Greeting & Check attendance</b>
<b> II/ Preparation:</b>



- Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters.(jumbled words)
- Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks,do homeworks.


<b> </b> <b>III/ Checking:</b> -T sticks the poster on the bb.


<b>1.</b> rofu = 2.loelh = 3.enma = 4.ether = 5.ifev =


- T asks Ss to rearrange the letters to make them meaningful words .


- T devides Ss in to 2 teams. One by one to go to the bb to write .T corects and finds out
the winner .


<b>*Answer keys</b>: 1.four; 2.hello; 3.name; 4.three; 5.five


<b>*** New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Presentation 1(10ms)</b>


+ Pre teach:Vocabulary:- T elicits words


- Present these vocabulary:


- Fine, thanks: Khoẻ, cám ơn(meaning)
- Miss: Cô(meaning) (cha cú gia ỡnh)
- Mrs:Bà(meaning)


- Mr : ông, ngài.( đặt trc tên người đàn ông)



<b>+Checking</b>: What and where:


<b>2. Asks and answer about the health.</b>


-T sets the scene: Lan goes to school and meets
Ba. She greats him. T elicit the dialogue.


+R O R dialogue:
a.Lan: Hi, Lan
Nga: Hi, Nga
Lan: How are you?
Nga:I am fine, thanks


<b>+ Model sentence: </b>How are you?
I am fine, thank you


<b>3. Practice:(20ms)</b>


*A6(12): - T elicits 2 pics, asks Ss to make similar
dialogue in pairs.


- Then T checks some pairs.


* A7(13): T asks Ss to fill in the gaps to make a
completed dialogue between Nam and Lan.
- T checks some pairs and corrects mistakes.


<b>• Presentation 2:</b>


SS listen and repeat in chorus and


individially


And then copy down on their notebook


Work in group


Work in pairs to ask and answer the
questions:


+ How are you?
+ I am fine.
- Practice in pair
Copy down.


-Practice with a partner .
T: How are you?


S:...


-Go to the boarb and write down the old
numbers( one by one).


-Work individially.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(6)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=6>

+Revision numbers from 0 to 5:
+ Pre teach: Present number 6 to 10:


- Six: 6 - Seven: 7



- Eight: 8 - Nine: 9 - Ten: 10
+Checking: matching


* Practice: + Dictation:-T. reads some telephone
numbers.


Asks students to listen and write down by English
these telephone numbers: 820.029 / 950.443 /
22.653 / 621.590 / 510.682 / 768.527.


<b>3.Further practice:(7ms)</b>+Work square(poster).


<b>- Then T controls and corects.</b>


F S E O T


I N I N e


V T G X n


E w H O o


G O T E l


T F O U r


s i x v n


s e v e n



-Work in pairs.Listen to teacher and slap
the word that they hear).


- Students to listen and write down by
English these telephone numbers


Write down the words that they hear on
their notebooks.


Work in group(2 groups)


-Go to the boarb and circle the word that
they find on the work square.


Anwer key:


Five, Two, Eight, Ten<sub></sub>
<sub></sub> Nine, Ten, Four, One
One<sub></sub>


Seven<sub></sub>
<sub></sub> Six


<b>III.Consolidation:(3ms)- How to ask &answer about health</b>


Ask them to learn by heart the numbers 0-10


<b>IV.Homework:(2ms)</b>Do the numbers3,4 page 5(Homework book).


-Learn by heart vocab,numbers,the ways to asks & answer about the health.


-Ss revise numbers from 0 to 10.


- Pepare for next lesson.


WEEK 2:



Teaching date: 30 / 8 / 2010.



Period 4


Unit 1: Greetings



Lesson 3: B1-3



<b>A/Objectives:</b>


- By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use “Good afternoon / good morning/ bye” to
greet one another and count- Write numbers from 10 to 15 correctly and fluently.


- T Helps Ss develop 4 skills (Develop’s Ss speaking skill.)


<b> *Knowledge:</b>


<b>To present: - Good morning/ good afternoon to greet each other/Number 11 to 15.</b>


<b> B/Preparation:</b>


- Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters,picture cues(4), Cards(5)
- Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks,do homeworks.



<b>C/Procedure:</b>


<b>I. Organization: </b>(1m) – Greeting & Check attendance


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(7)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=7>

a)T asks S1 to write how to ask and answer about the health on the bb. And then read aloud.
b) T asks S2 write numbers from 6 to 10 and then read aloud.


 <b>Keys:a)</b> S1- Hi. How are you? <b>b</b>) 6.six /7.seven / 8.eight / 9.nine / 10.ten.
S2 – I’m fine, thanks. And you?


S1- Fine ,thanks.


- T corrects and gives marks


<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Presentation (10ms)</b>


+ Pre teach: Present these vocabulary:


Good morning:Chào(Buổi sáng)- picture -visual
Good afternoon:Chµo(Bi chiỊu) )- picture
Good everning:Chµo(Bi tèi) )- explaination
Good night:Chóc ngđ ngon- Meaning- trans
Good bye:Chào tạm biƯt( Mine- Situation)
Children:TrỴ em( picture- visual)


We: (pro) chóng t«i,chóng tớ, chóng ta(ng«i 1 sè nhiÒu- situation)



+Checking: R & R.


<b>2.Practice:(5ms)</b>( B1,2(14,15)


*:T elicits 5 pictures B1& helps Ss practise greeting
one another in pairs.


Eg: S1- Good morning ! S2- Good morning !
Picture drill.


-T runs through the pictures.


<b>*B3(P15)(5ms)</b>:Presentation dialogue - T sets the
scene: Miss Hoa is talking to her Ss.


T helps Ss read dialogue (a) P 15 in chorus, T-wc,
S-S,Groups of 3,or groups of table…


-T asks Ss to translate dialogue in to vietnamese
(Note:We are = We’re).


<b>*B4(P16) (4ms)*Practice:T sets the scene: Lan meets </b>
Nga when she goes to school.


- T asks Ss to fill in the gaps.Then T checks some pairs.
T gives answer keys.


<b>*.Practice:(6ms)</b>- T elicits numbers from 11 to 15
+Word cues drill :Run through the cues, asks Ss



Listen and repeat in chorus and
individually


Copy down


Work individually


-Go to the board and write down.


- work in pairs


- Ss listen.


-Read in chorus, Half – half, T- Ss,
groups of table or groups of 3.
-Work in pairs


Example Exchange:
S1: Good (morning)
S2: Good (morning)


- Ss translate dialogue in to
vietnamese


-Work in pairs following example
exchange:


S1: Seven and eight?
S2: Fifteen



*keys:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(8)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=8>

calculate & give result s.Let’s practise in pairs.
-T gets feedback .


Eleven: 11 / Twelve: 12 / Thirteen: 13
Fourteen:14 / Fifteen: 15





<b>3.Further practice:(5ms)</b>


+Dictation: Teacher reads: Six, twelve, two, five,
thirteen, eight, eleven, four,fourteen, seven, ten,
fifteen, one, three, oh, nine


+ Nga: I’m fine, thanks


- Practice in pairs.


- Listen and repeat in chorus


- Ss work individually to read
numbers from 0 to 15 in the
following ways:


+ oh,one,two,three..
+ oh, two,four,six…


+ one, three,five,seven…


- Ss listen and write. Work
individually.


<b>III.Consolidation:(2ms</b>): - Asks Ss sums up the main contents of the lesson: “ to great one
another, numbers from 0 to 15”


<b>IV.Homework:(1ms) : </b>


-Ask them to learn by heart the numbers 0-15 & vocabulary.


-Do the numbers1,2 page 6(Homework book).Prepare for next lesson.


WEEK 2:



Teaching date: 31 / 8 / 2010.



Period 5


Unit 1: Greetings



<b>Lesson 4: C1-2-3</b>



<b>A/The aim and Objectives:</b>


<b>I.The aims: </b>


- Help Ss use “ How old are you?- I’m …” to talk about ages, count & write numbers from 16
to 20. Develop 4 skills.



<b>II.The objectives</b>:


-By the end of this lesson, ss will be able to use “How old are you? – I’m + ages.” To talk
about the ages and contrast with “ How are you?”.


- Ss can count from 16 to 20 correctly and fluently
- Develop’s Ss speaking and reading skill.


<b> *Knowledge:</b>


To present: -“How old are you” to talk about age and contrast with “How are you”
-Number 16 to 20


<b> B/Preparation:</b>


- Teacher’s preparation: lesson plan, posters,picture cues,Cards(2)
- Ss’ preparation: books, notebooks,do homeworks.


<b>C/Procedure:</b>


6+8


6+8 7+5


7+5


5+6


5+6



9+2


9+2


7+8


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(9)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=9>

<b>I. Organization:</b> (1m) – Greeting & Check attendance


<b>II. Checking up:</b> (5ms) nine
-T asks S1 to write vocabulary on board. eight


- T asks other Ss to write numbers: network three


<b>* Keys:</b> + vocabulary of last lesson.


+ Numbers: one, two,three,… four one


- T corrects and gives marks.


<b>III.New lesson:</b> eleven (…)


<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>T</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Presentation (10ms)</b>


+ Pre teach:
Present numbers:


Sixteen: 16 / Seventeen: 17



Eighteen: 18 / Nineteen: 19 / Twenty: 20


- Retell the numbers from 0 to 15.
+Checking: Slap the boarb.


<b>* C3(P18):</b>


<b>+ Presentation</b>: -T sets the scene: Nga & Lan
meet their teacher, Mrs Hoa.Ba meets Phong 1st
time.


- Ss listen to the dialogue and read silently.


T helps Ss practise dialogue : T-S; Ss-Ss; pairs…
-T gives instructions.


Teacher contrast with “ How are you?”


<b>*Model sentence:</b>


<i><b>How old are you? </b></i>
<i><b> I am (12) years old</b></i>


-T concept check meaning, form…


<b>2.Practice:(20ms)</b>


<b>a)</b>Pelmanism:- T. runs through the cards.
-T finds out the winner.



A B C D E
<b> Sixteen Seventeen Eighteen Nineteen Twenty</b>
a b c d e
16 17 18 19 20


<b>* Practice:</b>


- Word cue drill.


T runs through the cues.


16 17 18 19 20…


10’


20’


8’


Listen and repeat in chorus and
works individially


Copy down


Work individially


-Go to the boarb and write down


-Ss play the game with two teams.


- Translate in to Vietnamese .
-Work in pairs


-Work in group to find the words with
the number


-Work in pairs to ask and answer the
questions


-Write the number after listening.
-Work in individially


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(10)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=10>

-T models: T: How old are you?
S: I’m <b>/12/</b>


-T helps Ss practise speaking :T-Ss;Ss-Ss;pairs...


<b>3.Further practice</b>:(8ms:)


<b>*C5 P. 19</b>


-T guides Ss to play: “bingo”(Number 0-20)
Teacher reads : 10, 7, 19, 20, 6/ 8, 11,13, 15, 0/
16, 12, 1, 17, 3/ 5,4,2,18,15/ …..


-T finds out the winner.


-Let Ss draw a square with numbers: 0-20.


4’



- Listen and repeat in chorus.


- Ss practise speaking:
half- hafl; pairs, T-Ss…


<b>III.Consolidation:(2ms) </b>


- T sums up the main contentsof the lesson.


- Remember the numbers & ways to talk about the ages


<b>IV.Homework:(2ms)</b>


-Ask them to learn by heart the numbers 0-20<b>.</b>
<b>- </b>How to ask and answer about ages


-Doing the numbers1,2 page 6(Homework book)
-Prepare for next lesson.


WEEK 2:



Teaching date: 04 / 09/ 2010.



Period 6


Unit 1: Greetings



<b>Lesson 5: C4 - 5</b>




<b>A/The aims and Objectives:</b>


<b>I.The aims</b>: - To help Ss use numbers from 0 to 20, give telephone numbers.
- Develop 4 skills.


<b>II. The objectives</b>:


- By the end of this lesson, ss will be able to count numbers from 0 to 20 and read the
telephone numbers fluently & correctly.


<b>B/Preparation</b>: T: Lesson plan,extra board(survey), shark attack.
S: Do homework, books & notebooks.


C/Procedure:


<b>I.Organization</b>(1’) –Greeting & Check attendance.


<b>II.Checking up + Warm up</b>(5’) - T helps Ss play : Shark attack.


- T explains the rules of the game.


- T gives a cue: This is a noun that has 6 leters.


- Asks Ss guess the letters.T corrects and give answer keys.


<b> III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>T</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Presentation (10ms)</b> 7’



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(11)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=11>

+Checking: Slap the boarb:


<b>2.Practice:(20ms)</b>


<b>a)Pelmanism</b>:- T. runs through the cards.
-T finds out the winner.


A B C D E
<b> Sixteen Seventeen Eighteen Nineteen Twenty</b>
d c e b a
16 17 18 19 20


<b>b)jumbled words</b>:


+ ETGIH= eight + THRTENIE= thirteen
+TW EELV= twelve + EELVEN=eleven
+ TWNETY=twenty +FOTEENUR= fourteen
+S EEVN= seven +NIETENEN=nineteen


-T asks Ss to rearrange the letters to make the
words meaningful.T devides Ss in to 2 teams.
T checks the words and finds out the winner


<b>* Guessing game</b>: T asks Ss to write 1
number on a piece of paper.The rest of the
class guess.


Eg. “Three?” – Yes/No



<b>3.Further practice</b>:(8ms)


*Dictation and picture cue drill: - T reads the
following telephone numbers, asks Ss write
down.


04842689 054752590
091569742 0511854347
085571321 071837598
033632437 012541659.


-T checks Ss’ writing by asking as follows:
T: “What’s your number?


S: Oh-two-four…


-T helps Ss practise: T-WC, half – half, pairs…


<b>4.Survey:-T shows a poster.</b>
<b>Name</b> <b>Telephone numbers</b>


Mai 02403859077
Lan 02403828115


16’


6’


5’



Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially


Copy down
Work individially


-Go to the boarb and write down


-Work in group to find the words with
the number


Work individially


-Go to the boarb and write down


-Work in individially then play a game
in 2 teams.


- Copy answer keys.


*Play a game: Guessing game.


1 person go to the board & the others
guess the numbers.


- Work in pair to ask and answer
the telephone number


Eg.



S1: What is your number?
S2: (oh-five- one-one, eight-two)


-Ss write down on their notebook.
-Work individually


- Practice read the telephone
numbers.


<b>6</b> <b>9</b> <b>7</b> <b>20</b>


<b>12</b>


<b>5</b> <b>15</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(12)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=12>

-Asks Ss go around, asks information & fill in
the tables.


* Models: S1: What’s your name?
S2:My name’s ____


S1: What’s your telephone number?
S2: 02403 859077.


-T gets feedback.


-Ss go around the room and ask
information.


- Fill in the grid



- Work individually.


<b>III.Consolidation:(2ms)</b>


- Retell the main points of this lesson.( Numbers from 0 to 20,How to ask and answer the
telephone numbers)


<b>IV.Homework:(2ms)</b>


<b> </b> -Ask them to learn by heart the numbers 0-20.
-Doing exercises C1-7 page 8-12 in work book.
-Preparing new lesson: Unit 2: A1-4.


WEEK 3:



Teaching date: 06 / 09/ 2010.



Period 7


Unit 2: at school



<b>Lesson 1: A1-4</b>



<b>A/The aims and Objectives:</b>


<b> I.The aims</b>: - To help Ss use classroom imperative : “come in/ open your book/…”
- Develop 4 skills.


<b> II.The objectives</b>: - By the end of the lesson,Ss will be able to use classroom


imperatives correctly and fluently, understand T’s requests well.(T’s commands).


<b>*Knowledge:</b>


<b>Classroom imperative to understand the teacher|<sub>s command s:</sub></b>


<b>Come in / Sit down / Stand up / Open your book /Close your book.</b>


<b>B/ Preparation</b>:


<b> - T’s</b>: Lesson plan,poster, extra board(warm up)


<b> - Ss’</b>: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks.


<b>C/ Procedure: </b>


<b>I.Organization(1’)</b> – Greetings and check attendance.


<b>II.Checking up(5’)</b> – T hangs a poster:


a)9 – 5 = b) 16+2= c)4-4= d) 20-7=
e) 8: 4= f) 5+3= …..


(eight divide by four makes two)


- T asks 2 Ss to give the results on board : S1: a,b,c / S2: d,e,f.
- T corrects and give answer keys. Then gives them marks.


<b> III. New lesson:</b>



<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(13)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=13>

*Noughts and crosess:


9-5 20-7 10+2


17+1 6+5 6+8


3-3 6×3 5+3


<b>1.Presentation (8ms)</b>


+ Pre teach:
(To) come in:Đi vào
(To) sit down:Ngồi xuống
(To) Stand up :Đứng lờn


(To) open your book :Më s¸ch ra
(To) close your book: GÊp sách lại


* Checking: R & R


<b> 2 .Presentation text</b>: <b>A1 P.20</b>.


- T sets the scene: At the classroom, teacher
says sth to her Ss.


T elicits 6 pictures & helps Ss practise these
sentences.



- Concept check:


+ Asks Ss to translate these sentences in to
Vietnamese.


+ Use: imperatives.


 <b>3.A2(p.21</b>) - Match and write:


<b>*Practice</b>:- T helps Ss read 5 phrases in the box
& runs through 5 pictures.


- T asks Ss to match the imperatives with the
pictures.


- T gets feed back.


+Mime drill: - T asks Ss to look at T’s actions and
says:Teacher mines:


* come in / sit down / Stand up /
open your book / close your book
+Simon sayS: A3 p.22:


-T helps Ss play “ Simon says” to practise the
imperatives


<b>4.Further practice:(7ms)</b>


*Mapped dialogue: - T elicits the dialogue & helps


Ss practise dialogue: in pairs, T- WC, half-half…
(T sets the scene: Miss Huong & Ss are greeting
one another).


5’


7’


8’


9’


8’


- Play a game in two teams


- Then copy down answer keys


Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially


-Copy down.


 Come back your seat.


 Clap your hand


Work individially


-Go to the boarb and write down



- Listen and practice


- Ss translate in to Vietnamese


- Read 5 phrases in the box.


- Work individually


-Match the imperatives with the
pictures.Work in pairs.


*Student say:


come in/ sit down / Stand up
open your book / close your book


- Look at T’s actions then say
in chorus.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(14)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=14>

S1: Good morning!


S2: Good morning, Miss Hoa!
S1: How are you?


S2: We are fine. How are you?
S1: Fine, thanks. Sit down
S2: Yes Miss


S1: And open your books


S2: Yes Miss


Miss Hoa Children
…..morning…


…morning.
How are …?


… fine.How …?
Fine, thanks…


<b>…</b>


<b>III.Consolidation:(1m</b>)-Retell the main points of this lesson.


<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b> -Ask them to learn by heart the teacher|<sub>s commands</sub>
Do the numbers1,2 page 6(Homework book).Prepare for next lesson.

WEEK 3:



Teaching date: 07 / 09/ 2010.



Period 8


Unit 2: at school



<b>Lesson 2: B3,4,6</b>



<b>A/The aims and the objectives:</b>
<b>I.</b> <b>The aims:</b>



<b>- </b>To help Ss learn the alphabet and ask ,answer about name, spell the name: “
What’s your name? – My name’s… / How do you spell it / your name?”


- Develop 4 skills.


<b>II.Objectives:</b>


- By the end of this lesson, ss will be able to ask and answer the questions to talk about
name and learn the alphabet to spell names correctly and fluently.


<b>B/ Preparation</b>:


<b> - T’s</b>: Lesson plan,poster, word cues.


<b> - Ss’</b>: Do the homeworks, EL books and notebooks.


<b>C/ Procedure:</b>


<b>I.Organization(1’)</b> – Greetings and check attendance.


<b>II.Checking up(</b>5’)


- T calls 2 Ss come to the board and write the classroom imperatives.
-T corrects and gives .


<b>* keys</b>: - Come in, sit down, stand up …


<b> III. New lesson</b>:<b> </b>


<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>T</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>



 <b>Revision:(2ms)</b>


Simon says the teacher’s command:
- come in/ sit down/ Stand up/
- open your book/ close your book


<b>1.Presentation:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(15)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=15>

+ Pre teach(Vocabulary):
- T elicits vocabulary :
The ABC: <b>- A B C D E F G</b>


<b> - H I J K L M N O P </b>
<b> - Q R S T U V W X Y Z.</b>


-(to) spell: đánh vần


- How do you spell it? Bạn có thể đánh vần nó khơng?


+T helps Ss read the alphabet again.


<b>2.B4(p25)</b>:


- T presentation dialogue.


T sets the scene: <i>The T meets one of her Ss and ask </i>
<i>her some questions.</i>


-T helps Ss read dialogue : T-WC ; pairs.


- Let Ss practise the dialogue in pairs
- T helps Ss select out model sentences:
<i><b>T</b>: What’s your name?</i>


<i><b> Lan</b>: My name’s Lan.</i>


<i> <b>T</b> : How do you spell it/ your name?</i>


<i><b> Lan</b>: L-A-N,Lan.</i>


-Concept check: meaning,use,form.


<b>* Use</b>: asks and answer about name.


<b>* Form</b>:-What’s your name?
- My name’s + tên mình.
- How do you spell it?


<b>* Practice</b>:Word cues drill.
-T runs through word cues.


Khoa Mai Lam Son Loan
-T models:


<i><b> S1: What’s your name?</b></i>
<i><b> S2: My name’s Khoa.</b></i>
<i><b> S1: How do you spell it?</b></i>
<i><b> S2: K-H-O-A,Khoa.</b></i>


-T helps Ss practise speaking : T-WC; half-half; pairs.


-Asks Ss practise in pairs,ask and answer the real
name. Then T gets feedback.


<b>* Production</b>:


- Let Ss listen to the ABC song.


7’


14’


8’


4’


Listen and repeat in chorus


- Work individially
Copy down


- Listen and read the
dialogue in pairs.


Listen and repeat in chorus.
-Listen and copy down.
Work individially


- Copy down on their
notebooks.



- Work individually.


Copy down.


- Practise in pairs the
dialogue.


- Ss practise in pairs.


- Listen to the ABC song.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(16)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=16>

- Retell the main point of this lesson<b>.</b>


- T sums up: ask and answer about name, how to spell names.


<b> IV.Homework:(2ms</b>)


- Ask them to learn by heart vocabulary,the alphabet song,
How to ask and answer about name, then spell name.
- Do the numbers1,2 page 6(Homework book).


- Prepare for next lesson.


Preparing's day: 4/9/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 2: At school</b>


<b>Lesson 3: B3-6</b>
<b>Period: 9</b>


<b>A.Objectives:</b>


By the end of this lesson, ss are able to ask and answer the question to talk about the
name and spell the names


<b>I.Knowledge:</b>


“<b>What is your name </b>” questions and “<b>How do you spell it? </b>” with the alphabet (a-z)
to talk about your name


<b> II.Skill:</b>


Speaking
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence


<b> </b> <b>II.Checking:</b> -Check the form : Where do you live?
<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher<sub> s activities</sub>/</b> <b><sub>T</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub><sub> activities</sub>/ </b>
To) Live: Sèng -Meaning


(in) a house: Ng«i nhà - Picture
(on) a street:Con đng- Draw
(in ) a city:Thành phè – Meaning


Checking:



+Matching: SS match the words in English and
the words in VietNamese


Live Sèng
a house Thµnh phè
a street Nhµ


3’


10’


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(17)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=17>

a city ®ường


+Presentation dialogue: B1 P. 23
<b>Model sentences:</b>


A: Where do you live?
B: I live on Tran Phu street


In a house/ a city/ Hue/ Viet nam
<b>3.Practice:(20ms)</b>


+Word cue drill:


A city HCM city a house
Ha noi Le loi street





Hung vuong street
+Noughts and crossess:


A house Lach tray Trang Tien
A street Da nang A city


Dong Hoi hang bong St Hung Vuong


<b>3.Further practice:(8ms)</b>


Lucky number:


1. How do you spell Desk?
2. How do you spell Classroom?
3.LN


4. How do you spell Clock?
5. How do you spell Pencil?
6.How do you spell RULER?
7.LN


8. How do you spell Eraser?
9.LN


10. How do you spell window?


<b>1.Revision: (3ms)</b>


Write it up: (Survey from lesson 2)


I live on Long Chau st in Ha Noi


Hoa lives on Trang Tien st in Ha Noi….
<b>2.Presentation (10ms)</b>


Coppy down


Example exchange:
S1: Where do you live?
S2: On (Le Loi street)


Work in group to make questions and
answer following Example exchange:
S1: Where do you live?


S2: On (Le Loi street)


-Ss enjoy the game. ( in 2 group)


Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially


Copy down


Work in group to guess the leters of
the words


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(18)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=18>

+ Pre teach: Present alphabet


<b>a b c d e f g h i k l m n o</b>


<b>p q r s t u v w x y z</b>


Checking:
+ shark attack:


-2 - - - -- (house)
-3 - - - - -(Street)
-4 ---(open)


-5 - - - - (Close)
-6 - - - -(Goodbye)


+Rub out and remember dialogue: B4 P. 25
<b>Model sentences:</b>


What is your name?
How do you spell it?
<b>3.Practice:(20ms)</b>
+Word cue drill:


Students write their own names on cards to
make the cues for the drill


TuÊn H¶i


+ Presents alphabet song:
<b>4. Further practice(8ms)</b>


Anwer the questions: ( Lucky number)


1What is your name?


2.How old are you ?
3. Where do you live?


4.How do you spell your name?
+Lucky number:


1.How do you do?
2.LN


3.Where do you live?
4.LN


5.What is your name?


6.How do you spell your name?


7.What is the name of your city? How do you
spell it?


8.LN


9.What is your street name?
10.How are you?


Example exchange:
S1: What is your name?
S2:(Gives the real name)
S1: How do you spell it?


S2:(Gives the real name)
-Listen to the tape


-Work in group


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(19)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=19>

-Ask them to learn by heart the form :
How do you spell your name?


L A N
<b>IV.Homework:(2ms)</b>


-Do the numbers3 page 12; 6 p.13 (Homework book)
<b></b>


<b>---WEEK: 4</b>


Preparing's day: 19/9/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 2: At school</b>


<b>Lesson 4: My school (C1) P.26-27</b>


<b>Period: 10</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>


By the end of this lesson, ss are able to know how to use : This, that in positive and yes/
No question


<b>I.Knowledge:</b>



This/That positive statements and yes/ no questions to talk about people and things at
school.


<b>II.Skill:</b>


Speaking
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
<b> </b> <b>II.Checking:</b> -Check alphabet
<b> </b>III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Revision:(4ms)</b>
+


Jumbleb words:
VEEINGN=
TREEST=
LLEHO=
YICT=
NDSTAPU=
TEETHIRN=
MNAE=


<b>2.Presentation:(15ms)</b>
+Pre teach:



A student: Häc sinh(example)
Ateacher: giáo viên(example)
A school: Trờng học(example)
A class: Lớp học(example)
A desk: Bàn häc(Realia)


Work in individially
Answer key:


Evening
Street
Hello
City
Stand up
Thirteen
Name


Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(20)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=20>

+Matching:


A student Trêng häc
Ateacher Líp häc
A school hoc sinh


A class giáo viên
A desk Bµn häc



+Word cue drill:


Practice vocabulary and revise
<b>How do you spell it?</b>


“ ”


Học sinh Giáo viên


Bµn häc Trêng


Líp häc
Example exchange:


S1:what is this in Eng Lish?
S2: (A student)


S1: How do you spell it?
S2: (s-t-u-d-e-n-t)


+Presentation: C1 P.26- 27
Model sentences:


This is my desk
That is school
Is this your class?


Is that teacher Yes, it is



No, it is not
<b>3.Practice:(20ms)</b>


+Picture drill: T uses pictures from P.26- 27
Example exchange:


S1:Is this your class?
S2:No, it is not


+Realia drill:


T points to real things in and around the
classrom


Example exchange:
S1:Is this your desk?
S2: Yes, it is


Work in individially to match the word
in English with the words in


Vietnamese


Work in pair to ask and answer
following the question and the word
cues


Work in chorus, Work in pair



Copy down


Work in pair


Work in pair
<b>III.Consolidation:(3ms)</b>


-Asking them to learn by heart the form: Is this/ that….?
<b>IV.Homework:(2ms)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(21)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=21>

Preparing's day: 19/9/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 2: At school</b>


<b>Lesson 5: My school (C2-4) </b>


<b>Period: 11</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>


By the end of this lesson, ss are able to ask and answer the question to talk about things
in the classroom


<b>I.Knowledge:</b>


“What is this?/ that” “It is a/ an…..” to talk about things in the classroom
<b>II.Skill:</b>


Speaking
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>



<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting


-Check attendence


<b> II.Checking:</b> -Check the form: S1:Is this your desk?(1m)
S2: Yes, it is


<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Presentation:(15ms)</b>
+Dialogue build:


Teacher: What is this?
Class:It is a door


Teacher: How do you spell it?
Class:D-O-O-R?


+Pre teach:


Use pictures and realias to present vocabulary:
A door: Cưa chÝnh


A window:Cưa sỉ
A board:B¶ng
A clock: Đồng hồ
A waster basket:Sọt rác


A school bag:Cặp


Work in group


Teacher Class


What…? It is….
How do….?


D….


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(22)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=22>

A pencil: Bót chì
A pen: But


A ruler:Thớc
An eraser: Tâỷ
+Checking: R O R
<b>2.Practice:(17ms)</b>
<b> Wordsquare:</b>


-Presents the wordsquare & asks Ss to work in
pairs to find out the words by circling the
word.


-Devides the class into two groups to practice.
- Corrects & comments.


<b>3.Further practice:(7ms)</b>
<b> Lucky number:</b>



- Introduces the requirement & helps Ss to play
the game in groups.


-Corrects & comments
* Questions:


1. How do you spell DESK ?


2. How do you spell CLASSROOM ?
3. LUCKY NUMBER


4. How do you spell CLOCK ?
5. How do you spell PENCIL ?
6. How do you spell RULER ?
7. LUCKY NUMBER


8. How do you spell ERASER ?
9. LUCKY NUMBER


10. How do you spell WINDOW ?


-Practicing in two groups.
W P E N S C E X
O E D D C L R D
D N E O H O A R
N C S O O C S A


I I K R O K E O


W L R U L E R B



SS must find out the words in the
wordsquare


- Playing the game in groups by
answering the questions.


-Correcting the mistakes.


<b>1 2 3 4 5</b>
<b> 6 7 8 9 10</b>


<b>III. Consolidation.(3ms)</b>


- Asks Ss to give the questions used to talk about things
in the classroom


‘What’s This/That ?’ ‘ It’s a/an…’


- Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson.
<b>IV.Homeworks: (2ms)</b>


- Study the ‘What’s This/That ?’ ‘ It’s a/an…’ to talk about things in
the classroom.


- Study the model dialogue


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(23)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=23>

Preparing's day: 20/9/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:



<b>Unit 3: At home</b>


<b>Lesson 1: My house (a1-2) </b>


<b>Period: 12</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>


By the end of this lesson, ss are able to ask and answer the Wh question to talk about
things in the house.


<b>I.Knowledge:</b>


Wh questions with this/that/these/those and living room vocabulary to talk about
things in the house


What is this?


It is a bookself
<b>II.Skill:</b>


Speaking
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting


-Check attendence


<b> II.Checking:</b> -Check the vocabulary (2ms)
<b>III.New lesson:</b>



<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Presentation:(10ms)</b>


+Pre teach:Use pictures and realias to present
vocabulary:


A lamp: Đèn


A bookshelf: Giá sách
A chair: Ghế


A couch: GhÕ bµnh
An armchair: GhÕ tùa
A table: Bµn


Work in group


Teacher Class


What…? It is….
How do….?


D….
- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.





A T. V: Ti vi
A stool: GhÕ
A stereo: radio


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the prounciation by matching the
words & the pictrures.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


-Copying the words &Correcting the
pronunciation


Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(24)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=24>

- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words


+Checking: R O R


<b>2.Vocabulary practice:(10ms)</b>
+Slap the board:


A lamp A bookshelf


A chair A couch An armchair
A table A T. V A stool


- Introduces the rules & helps Ss to practice in
two groups.


- Corrects & comments.


- Presents the words & helps Ss to read .
- Erasers the words & checks S’s reading.
- Asks Ss to rewrite the missing words.
- Corrects & comments


<b>3.Presentation:(10ms)</b>
+Presentation text: A2 P.31
+Model sentences:


What is this?/that?
It is a table


What are these?/those?
They are tables



- Introduces & Asks Ss to read the text.
- Checks S’s reading.


- Introduces the model sentence & helps Ss to
practice.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments
<b>4.Practice:(10ms)</b>


+Picture drill: A2. P31
Example exchange:
S1:What is this?
S2: It is a….


S1:What are those?
S2:They are …….


- Introduces the example exchange & Hepls Ss
to practice.


- Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.


- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .


-Practicing in two groups. Correcting


the mistakes.


Work in group (2 group)


- Reading the text.


- Correcting the pronunciation.
Copy down


<b>* Example exchange:</b>


<i><b>S1: What’s this ?</b></i>
<i><b>S2: It’s a...</b></i>


<i><b>S1: What are those ?</b></i>
<i><b>They’re...</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(25)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=25>

- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


<b>III. Consolidation.(2ms)</b>


- Asks Ss to give the ‘Wh’ questions with (This/that) These / Those & living- room
vocabulary


- Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson.


<b>IV. Homeworks: (1m)</b>


- Study the ‘Wh’ questions with (This/that) These / Those & living- room vocabs.
- Study the model dialogue by heart.



- Prepare pictures of things in the house.
The end


<b>WEEK: 5</b>


Preparing's day: 27/9/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 3: At home</b>


<b>Lesson 2: My house (a3-4) </b>


<b>Period: 13</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>


By the end of this lesson, ss are able to ask and answer the question to talk about family
member, the way to using positive pronoun


<b>I.Knowledge:</b>


Family vocabulary, possitive pronouns my, your, her, his and “ Who is this?/That?”
questions to talk about family members


<b>II.Skill:</b>


Speaking
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b> I.Settlement :</b> -Greeting (1m)


-Check attendence
<b> II.Checking:</b> (2ms)


-Check the form:


S1:Is this your desk?


S2: Yes, it is
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(26)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=26>

<b>1. Preteach:</b>
My


His family/father/mother/brother/sister
Her


Your


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the


meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words
<b>2. Presentation text: A3</b> P 32


a) Grid Ba's family


Tªn Quan hƯ Tu


ỉi nghiƯpNghỊ
Ba


Nga Mother


b) Dialogue build:
S1: who's that?
S2: It's his mother
S1: What's her name?
S2: Her name's Nga


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.



-Copying the words.


- Listening to the dialogue.


- Practicing the dialogue in chorus.
- Practicing the dialogue in pairs.


-Correcting pronunciation & the
mistakes.


<b>II. Practice:(15ms)</b>
Word cue drill:


<i> Nga H Lanà</i>
<i> 35 40 15</i>


<b>III. Production:(8ms)</b>
Describe and draw*:


Example Exchange:
S1: Who's that?


S2: That's his mother/father/sister
S1: What's his/her name?


S2: His/her name's Nga/Ha/Lan


Ss draw their family. In pairs they
practise:



S1: Who's this?
S2: It's my...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(27)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=27>

- Asks Ss to explain the way to use who's this/ that?.
- Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson.
<b>V.Homework</b>: (1m)- Study the possessive pronouns.


- Exercise:


- Prepare the new lesson.


...
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 27/9/2009


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 3: At home</b>
<b>Lesson 3: numbers (B1-2) </b>


<b>Period: 14</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>


By the end of this lesson, ss are able to count from 21 to 100 and how to read plural
noun (s/z/iz)


<b>I.Knowledge:</b>



Numbers 21-100 and pronunciation of plural nouns(/s/, /z/, /iz/ to count things in the
classroom


<b>II.Skill:</b>


Speaking
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence


<b> II.Checking:</b> -Check the vocabulary
<b> </b>III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Revision(2ms)</b>
+Board drill:
Teacher asks:


What is number 9/10/7/25/5/29/1/15?
<b>2.Presentation:(10ms)</b>


+Pre teach: Use the card to present voabulary
Thirty:30


Forty: 40
Fifty: 50
Sixty:60
Seventy: 70


Eight:80
Ninety: 90


One hundred: 100


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).


A= 1 B D F H I K N O P Q R S T
U V W S Y Z= 26


Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially


Copy down


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(28)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=28>

Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.



- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
+Checking:What and where:


80 100


65 51 44 77 32


-Presents the content & helps Ss to read the
words.


-Erasers the words & helps Ss to read.
-Asks Ss to write the words.


- Corrects & comments.
<b>3.Practice:(20ms)</b>


+Snakes and ladder: B1 P.35
+Realia: B2 P.36


following example statements:
S1: There one door


S2: And there are 22 desks
<b>4.Further practice:(8ms)</b>
+Dictation lists:


T reads: Desk, rulers, benches, students, tables,
books, clocks, couches, door, windows, houses,
lamps



- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


-Copying the words.


Work in group


Work in pair


following example statements:
S1: There one door


S2: And there are 22 desks
-Work in pair


-Work in individially
Students write:


/s/ /z/ /iz/
desks Rulers Benches
Students Tables Couches
Books Doors Houses
Clocks Windows


lamps
<b>IV.Consolidation:(3ms)</b>


- Asks Ss to give the pronunciation of plural nouns (/s/, /z/, /iz/ ).
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.



<b>V.Homework:(1m)</b>


- Study the pronunciation of plural nouns (/s/, /z/, /iz/ ).
- Exercise: 1 & 2 .P 21. Workbook.


- Prepare the school aids such as: ruler, pencil, pen...


...
...
...
Preparing's day: 27/9/2009


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 3: At home</b>
<b>Lesson 4: numbers (B3-5) </b>


<b>Period: 15</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(29)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=29>

many...are there ?
<b>I.Knowledge:</b>


How many ...are there? Questions and further practice in numbers to talk aboutthings in
the classroom, the living room and the family


<b>II.Skill:</b>


Speaking


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence


<b> II.Checking:</b> -Check the vocabulary
<b> </b>III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Revision (5ms)</b>+Chain game: B2 P.36


Students use the information they have filled in
B2P.36 to describe their classroom to check the
form “There is.


There are..”
Example:


S1: There is one door


S2: There are one door and six windows
S3:...


<b>2.Presentation:(10ms)</b>
+Presentation text: B3 P.37


- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text.
- Asks Ss to read the text in individual.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


-Present the text by T reads the model and
gives the structures and gives the new structure
+Model sentences:


How many doors are there ?
-Gives the form:


How many+plural noun+ are there+ in your..
There are/ is+ Number+ n


- Gives the usage(by Vietnamese)
<b>3.Practice:(20ms)</b>


+Picture drill:B2 P.36 & B5 P.37


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss
to practice.


- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.


- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<b>4.Production:(7ms)</b>


+Kim|<sub>s game: picture P.31</sub>



Work in individially


-Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially


- Reading the dialogue in individual.
-Correcting the pronunciation.


Copy down


<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
Ex:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(30)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=30>

+S urvey: Copy the survey on the board and
make up the questions:


S1: How many people are there in your family?
S2: There are ..


Name In your family? In your house? In your classroom?


people Chairs lamps tables desks windows students


Nam 3


<b>IV.Consolidation:(1m)</b>



- Asks Ss to give the questions & the numbers to talk about things in the classroom, the
living-room & the family.


S1: -How many doors are there ?
desks


S2: -There is one/ there are [two]
- Asks Ss to summarise the general idea of the lesson.


<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>


- Study ‘How many…are there ?’ questions & the exchange.
- Exercise: 3 & 4. P 22. Workbook.


- Prepare the picture on page 38.


...
...
...
...


<b>Week: 6</b>


Preparing's day: 1/10/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 3: At home</b>
<b>Lesson 5: numbers (C) </b>



<b>Period: 16</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>


By the end of this lesson, ss are able to talk about the jobs
<b>I.Knowledge:</b>


Reading a text about a family to understand the details and talk about jobs
<b>II.Skill:</b>


Reading


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence


<b> II.Checking:</b> -Check the form : “how many ...”
<b> </b>III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Revision(3ms)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(31)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=31>

+Pre teach:


An engineer(picture): Kû s
A doctor (picture):b¸c sü
A nurse (picture):Y t¸


- Introduces the words by explaining the


meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
+Checking: Net works


<b>Jobs</b>



a doctor a teacher


-Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to work
in individual to find out the jobs.


-Asks Ss to compare in pairs.
-Asks Ss to give the information.
-Corrects & comments.


+Open prediction:


Lan|<sub>s family</sub>


How old..?



What does he/she do..?


Father
Mother
Brother
Lan


<b>3.While reading(20ms)</b>


Asks students to read C1 P.38 to check their
predictions


+Noughts and crosses:


T asks questions from a to h in C1 P.38
Question i:


How many books are there in Lan|<sub>s living </sub>


room?


a b c
e f g
h i d
<b>4.Post reading:(7ms)</b>


+Word cue drill: C2 P.39


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss



- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


-Copying the words.


- Working in individual to find out the
jobs &


comparing in pairs.


- Giving the information & correcting.
Working in pairs to guess about Lan’s
family:


How old...?


What does he/ she do?


Reading C1 P.38 to check their
predictions


Working in groups to ask and anwer


the question in C1 P.38


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(32)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=32>

to practice.


- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.


- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
+Transformation writing:


Ss transform the sentences in C1.P.38 with the
information in C2P.39 to write about Song|<sub>s </sub>


family


- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.


<b>IV..Consolidation:(1m)</b>


Check the form : “How many...?
There is/are....”
<b>V.Homework:(1m)</b>



Do the number 3 P.22 (Homework book)


...
...
...
Preparing's day: 2/10/2009


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 3: At home</b>


<b>Lesson 6: Grammar practice P.40-43 </b>


<b>Period: 17</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>


By the end of this lesson, ss are able to practice again : TO BE , there is/ are
<b>I.Knowledge:</b>


Further practice in “ Be” , imprative, numbers,question words, there is, there are,and
funiture vocabulary


<b>II.Skill:</b>
Speaking


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting


-Check attendence



<b> II.Checking:</b> -Not check
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>1.TO BE:(7ms)</b>


+Gap fill: Grammar practice 1-3 P.40


They/teachers We/student She/ a nurse
He/ an engineer I/ a student They/ sister
You/12 We/brother She/ a doctor


Answer keys:


1./ am – am – are – is – are.
2./ am – is – is – are – are.
3./ a) are – am; b) is – is.
c) is – isn’t ; d) are –
aren’t.


Work in group to make sentences with
To Be


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(33)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=33>

-Introduces the game & helps Ss to play in two
groups by choosing the cue & making
question.


-Corrects & comments the game.
<b>2.IMPERATIVE:(10ms)</b>



+Gap fill: Grammar practice 4 P.40


-Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to work
in individual to fill in the gaps.


-Asks Ss to compare in pairs.
-Asks Ss to give the information.
-Corrects & comments.


+Simon says


<b> 3. Question word:(10ms)</b>


+Gap fill: Grammar practice 6 P.41
+Answer given:


Song|<sub>s a student and he is 12. There are 4</sub>


people in Song|<sub>s family : his farther, his mother,</sub>


his sister and him. His farther is name is
Kien.He is 42 and he is a doctor. His mother|<sub>s</sub>


name is Oanh. she is 39 years old and she is a
nurse. His siter|<sub>s name is Lan. She is 15 and</sub>


she is a student.


Asks them to make questions for answer given:


a.12 b.4 c.Kien d.42 e.a doctor
f.Oanh g.39 h.a nurse i.Lan J.a student


<b>4.Numbers:(5ms)</b>


+Bingo: T reads: seventeen, seventy, eleven,
one hundred, thirty, sixteen, forty, fourteen,
three, nineteen...


<b>5.Furniture:(10ms)</b>


+Crossword Puzzle: Grammar practice 10 P.43
+Guessing game:


example exchange:
S1: Is it a TV?
S2: No, it is not


-Comparing in pairs & giving the
information.


Example exchange:


<b> </b>They are teachers


<b>-</b> Working in individual to fill in the
gaps.


-Comparing in pairs & giving the
information.



Answer keys:


a) come in ; b) sit down.
c) open your book ; e) stand up.
d) close your book.


- Working in individual to fill in the
gaps.


-Comparing in pairs & giving the
information.


*Answer keys:


a) What is ; b) Do
-live.


c) Who - is ; d) What
- is.


Work in individially
+Anwers key:


1.How old is Song?


2.How many poeple are there in his
family?


3.What is his farther|<sub>s name?</sub>



4.What does he do?


5.What is his mother|<sub>s name?</sub>


6.How old is she?
7.what does do?


8.Whatis his sister|<sub>s name?</sub>


9.What does she do?
T- whole class


SS choose 9 numbers


Work in groups
Work in pairs:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(34)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=34>

S3:Is it a chair?
S2: Yes, it is


+T/F repetition drill: picture B5 P.37
There is a TV


There are 3 stools
There are 4 people


There are 2 armchairs and 2 chairs
There are 7 books



There are 2 lamps
There is a lamp


There is a steeo and a telephone


example exchange


(Repeat)
(Silent)
(Repeat)
(Repeat)
(Silent)
(Silent)
(Repeat)
(Repeat
<b>IV.Consolidation:(2ms)</b>


Check the form : “How many...?
There is/are....”
<b>V.Homework:(1m)</b>


Prepare to do a test
<b>D.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
Preparing's day: 4/10/2009


Teaching's day: 6G:



<b>Written test</b>
<b>Time: 45minutes</b>


<b>Period: 18</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>


<b>I.Knowledge:</b>


Check their knowlegde from untit 1 to unit 3 by doing a paper test
<b>II.Skill:</b>


Writing


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting


-Check attendence


<b> II.Checking:</b> -Not check
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


I.C hoose the best answer : a, b,c or d? (2,5M)
<b>1</b>.This is my...Ý


<b>a</b>.hello <b>b</b>.hi <b>c</b>.family <b>d</b>.fine


<b>2.</b>We are in the ...


<b>a</b>.living room <b>b</b>.window <b>c</b>.table <b>d</b>.door



<b>3.</b>There are four...in my family: my father, my mother, my brother and I.


<b>a</b>.dogs <b>b</b>.people <b>c</b>.window <b>d</b>.chairs


<b>4</b>. My mother is thirty-five...old.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(35)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=35>

<b>5</b>. She is a...


<b>a</b>.doctors <b>b</b>.engeneer <b> c</b>.teachers <b>d</b>.student


<b>6.</b> We...on Tran Hung Dao street..


<b>a</b>.address <b>b</b>.is <b>c</b>.live <b>d</b>.are


<b>7.</b> ...are you? I am fine, thanks.


<b>a</b>.Where <b>b</b>.what <b>c</b>.How <b>d</b>.Who


<b>8.</b> Is this ... friend? -Yes, he’s my friend.


<b>a</b>.his <b>b</b>.her <b>c</b>.my <b>d</b>.your


<b>9.</b> This is...eraser ?


<b>a.</b> on <b>b</b>. an <b>c. </b>a <b>d</b>.in


<b>10</b>. What is your...? -My name is Lan.


<b>a</b>.name <b>b</b>.student <b>c.</b>teacher <b>d</b>.friend



III.Match the pairs of sentences (1,5M)


A B


<b>1.</b>What is this? a. Yes,it is.


<b>2</b>.Are these your pens? b. It’s a book.


<b>3.</b>Is that your house? c.I live on Tran Phu street.
<b>4.</b>Who is that? d. No, it isn’t. It’s his ruler
<b>5.</b>Where do you live? e. No, there aren’t.


<b>6.</b> Is this your ruler? f. That’s Mai
<b>III. Write the dialogues in the correct order</b>. <b>(3ms)</b>


Children: We’re fine, thank you. How are you?
Miss Hoan: Good afternoon, children.


Children: Bye.


Miss Hoan: Fine, thanks. Good bye.
Children: Good afternoon, Miss Hoan.
Miss Hoan: How are you today?


Children: ...
Miss Hoan: ...
Children: ...
Miss Hoan: ...
Children: ...


Miss Hoan: ...
<b>II.Write the words for the numbers. ( 1 M )</b>


<b>a</b>. 15 = ...; <b>c</b>. 28 = ...
<b>b</b>. 30 = ...; <b>d</b>. 59 = ...


<b> V.Put the words in the corects order. (2ms)</b>
<b>1</b>. / many / how / are / people / there / ? /.


...
<b>2 </b>. / my / this /teacher / is / .


...
<b>3</b>. / an / he / engineer / is /.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(36)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=36>

...


THE END


<b>Can improved:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(37)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=37>

<b>Week:7</b>


Preparing's day: 10/10/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Trả bài kiểm tra 1 tiết</b>
<b>Time: 45minutes</b>


<b>Period: 19</b>


<b>A.Objectives:</b>


<b>I.Knowledge:</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from
the text.


<b>II.Skill:</b>
Writing


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting


-Check attendence
<b> II.Checking:</b> -Not check


<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>
I.Choose the best answer : a, b,c or d? (2,5M)


Key


<b>1</b>.How many peolpe are ...?
1:...


<b>a</b>.this <b>b</b>.that


<b>c</b>.there <b>d</b>.they


<b>2.</b>We are ... the living room.
<b>a</b>.in <b>b</b>.on



<b>c</b>.at <b>d</b>.into


<b>3.</b>There ... four peolpe in my family: my
father, my mother, my brother and I.3:...


<b>a</b>.is <b>b</b>.are


<b>c.</b>am <b>d</b>.does


<b>4</b>. ...is that? - That is Lan.


<b>a</b>.Where <b>b</b>.what


<b>c</b>.How <b>d</b>.Who


<b>5</b>. She is a...


<b>a</b>.doctors <b>b</b>.engeneer


<b> c</b>.teachers <b>d</b>.student
<b>6.</b> We...on Tran Hung Dao
street..


<b>a</b>.lives <b>b</b>.is


<b>c</b>.live <b>d</b>.are


<b>7.</b> ...are you? I am fine, thanks.



<b>a</b>.Where <b>b</b>.what


<b>c</b>.How <b>d</b>.Who


<b>8.</b> Is this ... friend? -Yes, he’s
my friend.


<b>a</b>.his <b>b</b>.her


<b>Answer:</b>
1.c


2.a
3.b


4.d
5.d


6.c


7.c
8.a


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(38)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=38>

<b>c</b>.my <b>d</b>.your
<b>9.</b> This is...eraser


<b>a.</b> on <b>b</b>. an


<b>c. </b>a <b>d</b>.in



<b>10</b>. What ...your name? -My name is
Lan.


<b>a</b>.is <b>b</b>.are


<b>c.</b>am <b>d</b>.does


II.Match the pairs of sentences (1,5M)


A B


<b>1.</b>What is this? a. Yes,it is.
<b>2</b>.Are these your pens? b. It’s a book.
<b>3.</b>Is that your house? c.I live on


Tran Phu street.
<b>4.</b>Who is that? d. No, it isn’t.


It’s his ruler
<b>5.</b>Where do you live? e. No, they aren’t.
<b>6.</b> Is this your ruler? f. That’s Mai


<b>III.Write the words for the numbers. ( 1 M )</b>
<b>a</b>. 15 = ...;


<b>c</b>. 28 = ...
<b>b</b>. 30 = ...;


<b>d</b>. 59 = ...



<b>III. Write the dialogues in the correct order</b>.
<b>(1m)</b>


Children: We’re fine, thank you. How are
you?


Miss Hoan: <i>Good afternoon, children.</i>


Children: Bye.


Miss Hoan: Fine, thanks. Good bye.
Children: <i>Good afternoon, Miss Hoan</i>.
Miss Hoan: How are you today?


<b>IV. Read. Then write the answer</b>.(2ms)
I am Nam. This is my family. We are in
our yard. There are five people in my family:
my father, my mother, my brother, my sister
and me. My father is forty-two. He is a doctor.
My mother is thirty-nine. She is a nurse. My
brother is ten. My sister is twelve. They are
students.


1. How many people are there in his family?
2.How old is his father?


3.what does he do?


4what does his mother do?



<b> VI.Put the words in the corects order. (2ms)</b>
<b>1</b>. / many / how / are / people / there / ? /.


...
<b>2 </b>. / my / this /teacher / is / .


...


10.a


Key:


1:...b... 2:...e...
3:...a... 4:...f...
5:...c... 6:...d...


a.fifteen


b.twenty-eight
c.thirty


d.fifty-nine
=>


Miss Hoan: Good afternoon, children.
Children: Good afternoon, Miss
Hoan.


Miss Hoan: How are you today?



Children: We’re fine, thank you. How
are you?


Miss Hoan: Fine, thanks. Good bye.
Children: Bye.


1There are five people in my family.
2.He is forty-two.


3. He is a doctor.
4.She is a nurse.


1.How many people are there?
2.This is my teacher.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(39)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=39>

<b>3</b>. / an / he / engineer / is /.


...
<b>4</b>. /name/ her/ is / Nga/.


...
THE END


4.Her name is Nga.


<b>IV.Homework:</b>


-Prepare new lesson: Unit 1: A1-2
<b>D.Can improved:</b>



...
...
...


Preparing's day: 10/10/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 4: big or small</b>


<b>Lesson: 1:Where is your school?A 1-2 -P.44</b>
<b>Period: 20</b>


<b>A.Objectives:</b>


By the end of this lesson, ss are able to practice Yes/ No question to use possessive by
reading a decription of a scchool


<b>I.Knowledge:</b>


Reading a desciption of a school with practice in possessive “s” to talk about
possessions


<b>II.Skill:</b>
Reading


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting (1m)
-Check attendence



<b> II.Checking:</b> -Not check
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Pre reading:(12ms)</b>
+Pelmanism:


<b> I Thu He You She</b>
<b> </b>


<b> His My Your Her Thu|<sub>s</sub></b>
+Pre teach:


Big:(realia) To, lín
Small: :(realia) Nhá, bÐ


In the city(Picture): ë thµnh phè
In the country: (Picture)ë n«ng th«n
+Checking: ROR


Work in group


Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially


Copy down


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(40)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=40>

+Predict: Matching



Big Phong|<sub>s school small</sub>




In the city Thu|<sub>s school In the city</sub>


+Model sentences:


S1:Is Phong|<sub>s school small?</sub>


S2:Yes, it is


S1:Is Thu|<sub>s school small?</sub>


S2:No, it is not


<b>2.While reading:(20ms)</b>
+A1 P.44


Ask them to correct their predictions
+Comprehension question:


A2 P.44 a-d


<b> 3.Post reading(8ms)</b>


+Yes/ no questions answer drill:
Phong|<sub>s school</sub>



Thu|<sub>s school</sub>


Your school Big/ small?
Your brother|<sub>s school In the city/ country?</sub>


Your sister|<sub>s school</sub>


T- whole class (to predict )


Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially


Copy down


Work in groups


Read the text and check their preditions
Work in groups(Answer the questions
in A2 P.44 from a to d


Work in groups


<b>VI.Consolidation:(2ms)</b>
-Check the vocab
<b>V.Homework:(2ms)</b>


Do the numbers 1P.35/3.36
<b>D.Can improved:</b>


...


...
...
Preparing's day: 10/10/2009


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 4: big or small</b>


<b>Lesson: 1:Where is your school?A 3-5 -P.44</b>
<b>Period: 21</b>


<b>A.Objectives:</b>


By the end of this lesson, ss are able to know more about numbers and school
vocabulary


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(41)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=41>

Reading a text about school to understand details and get further practice in numbers
and school vocabaly


<b>II.Skill:</b>
Reading


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence


<b> II.Checking:</b> -Check the form of yes/no questions
<b> </b>III.New lesson:



<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Revision:(4ms)</b>
+Bingo:


Elicit and list numbers on the board:2, 5,
8,100, 200,400,32,54,600, 900, 10


-T reads: 200, 5, 8,32,54,900
<b>2.Pre reading:(5ms)</b>


+Open prediction:


Asks them to guess what these numbers are
about , to do with school:


<b>400, 900,8, 20</b>


EX student, teacher, desks, window...
<b> 3.While reading:(25ms)</b>


-Asks ss to read the text A3P.45 to correct their
prediction


+Answer given:
1.In the country
2.8


3.400



4.In the city


5.No, it is not. It is big
6.20


7.900


-Asks them to make question with these
answer


*Answer key:


1.Where is Phong|<sub>s school?</sub>


2.How many classrooms are there in Phong|<sub>s </sub>


school?


3. How many students are there in Phuong|<sub>s </sub>


school?


4.Where is Thu|<sub>s school?</sub>


5.Is it small?


6.How many classrooms are there in Thu|<sub>s </sub>


school?



7.How many students are there in Thu|<sub>s </sub>


school?


<b>4.Post reading:(7ms)</b>
A4 P.46


SS choose 5 numbers from the board


Work in group


Read the text and check their
predition(Work in individially )


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(42)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=42>

+Transformation writing:


Depending on whether ss live in the city or the
country, ss take on of the texts in A3P.45 and
rewrite it according to their own school


Work in individially
<b>III.Consolidation:(2ms)</b>


Check the form school vocabuly


<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>
Do numbers 4P.37/ 5P.38
<b>Can improved:</b>



...
...
...


The end


<b>Week: 8</b>


Preparing's day: 16/10/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 4: big or small</b>


<b>Lesson: 3: MY CLASS -B1-5 -P.47-48</b>
<b>Period: 22</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(43)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=43>

By the end of this lesson, ss are able to Listen to a dialogue about school to


understand the details; practising cardinal numbers, ordinal numbers and “Which” question
to talk about school.


<b> I.Knowledge:</b>


To practice the question : 1.Which class are you in ?
I am in class 6A


2.Which grade are you in ?
I am in grade 6


<b>II.Skill:</b>


-Listening


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence


<b> II.Checking:</b> -Check the form of yes/no questions
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Pre listening:(13ms)</b>
+Pre teach:


And:(Translation) :Vµ


The first floor:(Picture):TÇng 1
The sixth floor:(Picture):TÇng 6
+ROR: The first= 1st


The second=2nd


The third= 3rd


The fourth= 4th


The fifth= 5th


The sixth= 6th



The seventh= 7th


The eighth= 8th


The nineth= 9th


The tenth= 10th


+Predict dialogue:


Thu: Hello, which grade are you in?
Phong:Iam in grade...
Thu: And which class are you in?
Phong:...What about you?
Thu: Iam in grade...,class...
How many floors does your school have?
Phong:...It is asmall school.
Thu: My school has ...floors and my
classroom is on the ...floor. Where is your
classroom?


Phong: It is on the...floor.
<b>2.While listening:(20ms)</b>


-Asks ss to listen the text B1 P.47 to correct
their predictions


+Grid: B2 P.48



<b>3.Post listening:(8ms)</b>
+Board drill:




Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially


Copy down
Work in group


Work in groups


-Ss listen and check their predictions.
Ss work in pairs


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(44)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=44>

Grade Class Floor
Thu 7 7C 2nd


Phong 6 6A 1st


You


S1: Which grade is Thu in?
S2:She is in grade 6


S1: Which class is Thu in?
S2:She is in class 6A


S1:Where is her classroom?



S2:It is on the first floor.
<b>IV.Consolidation:(2ms)</b>


Check the cardinal numbers, ordinal numbers and “Which” question to talk about school


<b>V.Homework:(1m)</b>


Do numbers all exercises in part B ( workbook)
<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
Preparing day: 17/10/2009


Teaching day: 6G:


<b>Unit 4: big or small</b>


<b>Lesson: 4: Getting ready for school </b>–<b>C1-3 -P.49</b>
<b>Period: 23</b>


<b>A.Objectives:</b>


By the end of this lesson, ss are able to practice Simple present tense, positive
statements with I and vocabulary of routines to talk about habitual actions


<b> I.Knowledge:</b>



Present vocabulary of rountines , practice the form:
What do you do every morning?


I...
<b> II.Skill:</b>


Speaking


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence


<b> II.Checking:</b> -Check the form of yes/no questions
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Presentation:(13ms)</b>


+Pre teach:Use the pictures on p.49
(to)get up: Thức dậy


(to)Get dressed:Mặc quần áo
(to)brush your teethĐánh răng
(to)wash your face:Rửa mặt
(to)have breakfast:ăn sáng
(to)go to school:Đi học



- Introduces the words by explaining the


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(45)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=45>

- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words
+Checking:Slap the board


Thøc dËy Mặc quần áo Đánh răng
Rửa mặt ăn sáng Đi học
+Presentation text: C1.P.49


+Model sentences:


What do you do every morning?
Get up


I brush my teeth
Have breakfast
+Model sentences:


S1:What does Ba/ He/ She do every morning?
S2:Ba gets up at 6 oclock



brushes his teeth
Has breakfast
goes to school
<b>2.Practice:(20ms)</b>


a.Word cue drill:


following the example exchange:
S1:What do you do every morning?
S2:I get up


S2:What do you do then?
S1:...


...up ...dressed
...teeth ...face
...breakfast ...school


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss
to practice.


- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.


- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


b.Write it up: C3 P.49


individual.


- Give the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copy the words Correcting the
mistakes.


Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially


Copy down


- Read the dialogue in individual.
-Correct the pronunciation.


Work in pairs to practice the form:
Work in pairs to practice the model
sentences:


What does Ba/ He/ She do every
morning?


Ba gets up at 6 oclock


EX:


S1:What do you do every morning?


S2:I get up


S2:What do you do then?
-Ss work in group of 7.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(46)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=46>

+Write 5 sentences about what YOU do every
morning. Begin with:


Every morning, I get up. Then I...
<b>3.Further practice:(8ms)</b>


+Chain game:
S1:I get up


S2: I get up and brush my teeth


S3: I get up, brush my teeth and I get dressed
S4:...


-Work in pairs to practice the exchange
- Play in pairs & correcting the


mistakes


<b>III.Consolidation:( 2 ms)</b>
Check the model sentences


- Asks Ss to give the questions & answer to talk about routines.


- What does Ba / he / she do every morning ?


- Ba gets up.


He has breakfast.
She brushes my teeth.


goes to school.
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>
- Study the exchange.


- Exercise: write about your family member’s routines.
- Prepare the picture on page 50 & the clock.


<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
Preparing day: 18/10/2009


Teaching day: 6G:


<b>Unit 4: big or small</b>


<b>Lesson: 5: Getting ready for school </b>–<b>C 4-7 -P.50-51</b>
<b>Period: 24</b>


<b>A.Objectives:</b>



By the end of this lesson ss will be able to tell the time
<b>I.Knowledge:</b>


Telling the time


S1: What time is it?
S2:It is eight oclock.
ten fifteen.


half past ten.
<b>II.Skill:</b>


Speaking


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(47)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=47>

<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Presentation:(13ms)</b>
+Number dictation:


T reads: one ten, fourty thirty, five twenty,
three fifteen, six forty, seven forty five, ten
thrirty, twelve twenty five, eleven fifty, two
fifty five


+Pre teach:



The time: thời gian
Ten oclock: 10 giờ đúng
half past ten: 10 giờ 30 phút
(to) be late for: Muộn
“We are late for school”


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
+Checking: What and where


The time Ten oclock
half past ten (to) be late for
+Presentation picture : C4-5 P.50
+Model sentenses:


S1: What time is it?
S2:It is eight oclock.
ten fifteen.


half past ten.
<b>2.Practice:(20ms)</b>
+Picture/Realia drill:


Following the example exchange:
S1: What time is it?


S2:It is eight oclock.
+Word cue drill: C7 P.51


Get up Go to school
Have breakfast Go home
Following the example exchange:
S1:What time do you get up?
S2:At/ six o|<sub>clock/</sub>


<b>3.Further practice:(8ms)</b>
+Noughts and crosses:


Work in individially


Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially


Copy down


- Repeat the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Give the meaning & the


pronunciation.


- Copy the words Correcting the
mistakes


Work in groups


Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially


Work in pairs to practice example
exchange:


S1: What time is it?
S2:It is eight oclock.
ten fifteen.
half past ten.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(48)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=48>



6.10 6.30 4.45
7.00 11.00 11.30
3.15 4.20 5.30


S2:At/ six o|<sub>clock/</sub>


Work in groups to ask and answer the
questions about the time


<b>III.Consolidation:(2ms)</b>



Check the model sentences


Asks Ss to give the questions & answer to talk about the ti
<i><b> - What time is it ?</b></i>


- <i><b>It s ten o clock..</b></i>’ ’
- <i><b> ten fifteen.</b></i>


<i><b> half past ten</b></i>


- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>


- Study the model exchange.


- Exercise: write about your family member’s routines.


- Prepare the picture on page 52 & the things you usually do in a day.
-Do number 3 P.41/4 P.42


<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...


<b>Week: 9</b>


Preparing's day: 24/10/2009


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 5: things i do</b>


<b>Lesson: 1: My day (A1-2) </b>
<b>Period: 25</b>


<b>A.Objectives:</b>


By the end of this lesson ss will be able to use the simple present tense with I/ he/
she to talk about daily routines


<b>I.Knowledge:</b>


Present vocabulary , talking about the work of everyday
Every day I get up at six


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(49)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=49>

<b>II.Skill:</b>


Speaking and reading
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence


<b> II.Checking:</b> -Check the way to tell time
<b> </b>III.New lesson:


<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>



<b>1.Revision:(3ms)</b>


+Guessing game: SS choose a time and
complete the sentence:


It is ...nine fifteen...
Example: S1:Is it half past eight?
S2: No, it is not


S1:Is it nine fifteen?
S2:Yes it is


<b>2.Presentation</b>:(15ms)
+Pre teach:


(to) do your homework: Làm bài tập
(to) play games: Chơi trò chơi


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.



- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
+Checking: Slap the board:


go to school do your homework
play games Have breakfast
Get dressed


+Presentation text: A1 P.52:


- Introduces & Helps Ss tolisten to the text.
- Asks Ss to read the text in individual.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
Every day I go to school.


She goes


+Comprehension questions:
A2 P.53 a-d


-Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work in
pairs to answer. Then give the keys.


-Corrects & comments.


 Questions:


Work in individially


Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially



Copy down


-Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


-Copying the words & Correcting the
pronunciation.


- Reading the dialogue in individual.
-Correcting the pronunciation.


<b>*Model sentence:</b>


 <i><b>Everyday I go to school.</b></i>
<i><b> she goes </b></i>


-Working in pairs to answer. Then
giving the keys.


Answer:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(50)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=50>

1./ What does Nga do everyday ?



2./ What does she do everyday morning?
3./ What does she do everyday afternoon?
4./ What does she do everyday evening?
<b>3.Practice:(15ms)</b>


+Substitution drill:


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss
to practice.


- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.


- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .


-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments
Teacher :


Every day I get up at six
I brush my teeth


I wash my face
I get dressed
I have breakfast
I go to school
I play games



I do my homework.
<b>3.Production:(8ms)</b>
+Survey:


S1: What time do you get up?
S2: 5.30


Name Get up Have breakfast


Vien 5.30 6.15
... ...


2./ Everyday morning she goes to
school.


3./ Everyday afternoon she plays
games.


4./ Everyday evening she does her
homeworks.


<b>- </b>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.


Students :



Every day Nga gets up at 6
She brushes her teeth
She washes her face
...


...


Play game Do your home work


4.30 7.00
<b>III.Consolidation:(2ms)</b>


-Asks Ss to give the model sentence used to talk about daily routine


<i><b> Everyday I go to school.</b></i>
<i><b> she goes </b></i>


-Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
Write it up: Or ss orally report back:


Every morning, Vien gets up at five thirty. He has breakfast at six fifteen
<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>


- Study model sentence & the vocabulary.


- Write about your daily routine, using the substitution drill.
- Prepare the picture on page 53.


<b>C.Can improved:</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(51)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=51>

Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 5: things i do</b>


<b>Lesson: 2: My day (A3-4) </b>
<b>Period: 26</b>


<b>A.Objectives:</b>


By the end of this lesson ss will be able to use the simple present tense in Wh
questions with he/she to talk about other people|<sub>s daily routines</sub>


<b> I.Knowledge:</b>
Present vocabulary
Practice the form:


S1:What does Ba do after school?
S2:He washes T.V


<b>II.Skill:</b>
Speaking


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence


<b> II.Checking:</b> -Check the simple present tense
<b> III.New lesson:</b>



<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Presentation</b>:(15ms)
+Pre teach:


(to) listen to music:(picture): Nghe nh¹c
(to) watch T.V: :(picture) xem ti vi


(to) do the housework: :(picture) Làm công
việc nhà


(to) read: :(picture): Đọc
+Checking: Matching
+Ordering vocabulary:


T reads: Every morning, Lan gets up and listen
to music. every afternoon she comes home and
does the housework. then she washes T.V .
Every evening she reads and does her
homework


+Presentation text: A3 P.53:


- Introduces & Helps Ss tolisten to the text.
- Asks Ss to read the text in individual.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


<b>2.Practice:(20ms)</b>
+Picture drill: A3 P.53



- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss
to practice.


- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.


- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in


Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially


Copy down


- Copying down the words listening to
the sentences & take note the right
order.


- Checking & correcting
Answer keys:


1..(to) listen to music; 3. (to)
watch TV;


2.(to) do the houseworks; 4.(to) read
- Reading the dialogue in individual.
-Correcting the pronunciation.



<b>*Model sentence:</b>


- What does Ba do after school ?
– He watches TV.


<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
Model sentence:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(52)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=52>

groups & in pairs .


-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<b>3.Further practice:(7ms)</b>


+Noughts and crosses:


He/play games She/brush Lan/ do the
her teeth house work
Ba/ get dressed Nam/ go to Thu/ do her
school homework
She/ wash her He/ Have Mai/listen to
face breakfast music


school ?


–[ He/She] watches TV.


<b>-</b> Working in groups to choose the cue


& make the question & the answer.
*Example exchange:


<i>S1: What does Ba do every morning?</i>
<i>S2: [ He gets dresses ].</i>


Teacher- whole class
<b>III.Consolidation:(2ms)</b>


-Asks Ss to give the model sentence used to talk about other’s daily routine:


<i><b> </b></i> - What does [Ba/Lan…] do after school ?
–[ He/She] watches TV.


-Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
Write it up: Or ss orally report back:


Every morning, Vien gets up at five thirty. He has breakfast at six fifteen ...
<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>


- Study model sentence & the vocabulary.


- Write about your family members daily routine.
- Prepare the picture on page 54 & 56.


<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...


Preparing's day: 25/10/2009


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 5: things i do</b>


<b>Lesson: 3: My day (A5-6) </b>
<b>Period: 27</b>


<b>A.Objectives:</b>


By the end of this lesson ss will be able to use the simple present tense in Yes/no
questions and short answers to talk about daily rountines


<b> I.Knowledge:</b>


Present vocabulary
Practice the form:


Do you/ they play football?
Does she / he


Yes, I/ We/ They do
She/ he does
No, I/ We/ They do not
She/ he does not
<b>II.Skill:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(53)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=53>

<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>



<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence


<b> II.Checking:</b> -Check the simple present tense in wh question
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Revision</b>:(3ms)
+Pelmasim:


1. Go to do listen to watch
2. school homework music TV
<b>2.Presentation:(12ms)</b>


+Pre teach:


(to) play volleyball: Chơi bóng chuyền
(to) play football (soccer): Đá bóng
(to) play sports: Chơi thể thao


a girl: Cô gái, c« bÐ


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects


the mistakes.


- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words
+Checking: R.O.R


+Presentation dialogue: A5 P.54:


- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue.


- Asks Ss practice the dialogue in groups & in
pairs.


- Introduces the model exchange & helps Ss to
practice in groups & in pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


+Grid: asks ss to read the dialogue and make a grid
about Nga, Thu, Lan, Vui, girls with answer key(*)


Name Volleyball Football


Vui 


Nga 


Lan 



Thu 


<b>3.Practice:(20ms)</b>


+Yes/ no question answer drill: A6 P.53


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps Ss
to practice.


Work in groups


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.
- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


- Practicing the dialogue in groups & in
pairs.


-Correcting the pronunciation.
*Model sentence:


 <i>Do you / they play volleyball ? </i>


 <i>-Yes, I / they do.; No, I / they don t.</i>’



 <i>Does she / he play soccer ?</i>


 <i>-Yes, she / he does ; No, she / he </i>
<i>doesn t</i>’


-Filling in the table in individual,
correcting


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(54)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=54>

- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.


- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
Example exchange:


a,S1:Do you play sports?
S2: Yes, I do/ No, I don|<sub>t</sub>


<b>4.Further practice:(7ms)</b>


Find SO who: Name


...watches T.V ...


...Plays football



...does the housework
...Plays volleyball
...listen to music
...reads


-Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in
individual to interview each other by making
the Yes / No question & fill the information in
the table.


-Examples with Ss & fill the information in
the table .


- Asks Ss to go around & ask the other.


- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.


Example exchange:


S1: Do you / they play volleyball ?
S2: Yes, I / they do.; No, I / they don’t.
S1: Does she / he play soccer ?



S2: Yes, she / he does; No, she / he
doesn’t


<b>-</b> Working in to work in individual to
interview each other by making the
Yes / No question & fill the information
in the table.


<b>-</b> Going around & ask the other to get
the information to fill the information in
the table


Example exchange:
S1:Do you watch T.V?
S2: Yes, I do


S1: What is your name?
S2:{...}


S1: How do you spell it?
S2: ...


<b>III.Consolidation:(1m)</b>


Asks the form of yes/ no question
<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>


Do number ...
<b>C.Can improved:</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(55)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=55>

<b>Week: 10</b>


Preparing's day: 31/10/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 5: things i do</b>


<b>Lesson: 4: My routine (B1-3) </b>
<b>Period: 28</b>


<b>A.Objectives:</b>


By the end of this lesson ss will be able to practice simple present tense by reading a
picture story about Ba|<sub>s daily rountine</sub>


<b> I.Knowledge:</b>
Present vocabulary


Practice saying the time to do the works
<b>II.Skill:</b>


Reading


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence


<b> II.Checking:</b> -Check the simple present tense in wh question
<b> III.New lesson:</b>



<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Revision</b>:(3ms)
+Jumbled words:


okhueowsr= housework
tislen= listen


ader= Read
ypal= Play
cthaw= Watch


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(56)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=56>

<b> 2.Pre- reading:(15ms)</b>
+Pre teach:


(to) take a shower:(picture): T¾m vòi hoa sen
(to) eat: (mine): ăn


(to) start:(meaning): bắt đầu


(to) finish (antonym of start) Kết thúc
(to) have lunch (picture): ăn tra


(to) go to bed (picture): §i ngđ
+Checking: what and where


take a shower eat start
finish have lunch



go to bed
+Open predition:B2 P.57


Asks ss to fill in the time in the table for Ba:
-Introduces the pictures & asks Ss to guess
the times on which Ba does his daily routine &
fill in the table part 2 on page 57.


-Asks Ss to give their prediction.
-Comments.


<b>Presentation text: B2 </b>–<b> P56.</b>


- Introduces & Helps Ss toread the text.
- Asks Ss check their prediction.


- Corrects & comments.
<b>Grid: B2 </b>–<b> P57.</b>


-Asks Ss to read the dialogue in & fill in the
table in individual.


-Asks Ss to compare the information.
-Asks Ss to give the information.
- Corrects & comments.


<b>3. While reading:(15ms)</b>


+Read the text to check their predictions
<b>4.Post reading:(8ms)</b>



+ Asks ss to complete the last column in the
B2 table(about me)


+Asks ss to do B3.P.57


-Gives the requirement & ask Ss to work in


Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially


Copy down


Work in groups


-Guessing the times on which Ba does
his daily routine & fill in the table part 2
on page 57.


- Giving their prediction.


- Reading the text<b> .</b>


- Checking the prediction.


Action Time


Ba You


Get up


Go to school
Classes start
Classes finish
Have lunch
Go home
Go to bed


-Filling in the table in individual,
correcting<b> .</b>


Read the text in individially
Work in pairs


Work in individially
Work in pairs


<b>4. Survey:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(57)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=57>

groups to ask each other the questions :


a./ What time does Ba get up / Go to school /
have classes / Have lunch / Go home / Go to
bed ?


b./ What time do you get up / Go to school /
have classes / Have lunch / Go home / Go to
bed ?


& fill the answers in the box on the grid .
- Asks Ss to report the information about their


friends.


-Corrects & comments.


the questions fill the answers in the box
on the grid .


- Reporting the information about their
friends.


Answer:


a./ Ba get(s) up at 6.00.
go(es) to school 6.45.


has/have classes 7.00 –
11.15.


I has / have lunch 11.30.
go(es) home 5.00.
go(es) to bed 10.00
<b>III.Consolidation:(2ms)</b>


Asks the form of yes/ no question


- Asks Ss to give the questions & answers used to ask & answer the time to do the daily
routine:


<i><b>- What time does Ba get up ?</b></i>
<i><b>- He gets up</b></i>



- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>


- Study the questions & answers used to ask & answer the time to do
the daily routine:


- Exercise: write the time on which your family members do their
daily routines ( base on the table B2 P 57).


- Prepare the picture on page 58.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 31/10/2009


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 5: things i do</b>


<b>Lesson: 5: Classes (C1) </b>
<b>Period: 29</b>


<b>A.Objectives:</b>


By the end of this lesson ss will be able to talk about the school time table with have
and Don|<sub>t have, school subjects vocab </sub>



<b> I.Knowledge:</b>


Present vocabuly about the subjects in school
Practice the form:


S1:What do we have today?
S2:We have English.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(58)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=58>

<b>II.Skill:</b>
Speaking


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence


<b> II.Checking:</b> -Check the vocabulary
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>I.Presentation:(15ms)</b>
+Pre teach:


a timetable(realia): thời khoá biếu
English (Translation): Tiếng anh
Math(Realia): Môn toán


Literature(realia): Môn Văn


History(Realia): Môn lịch sử
Geography (Realia): Môn địalý
Monday (Realia): Thứ hai


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words
<b>+Checking: ordering vocab</b>


Reads: first we have literature. Then we
have Goegraphy . At 8 .40 we have English
and then we have math. At 10.15 we have
history . this is our timetable on Monday.
<b>+Presentation text: C1 P.58</b>


- Introduces & Helps Ss toread the text.
- Checks S’s reading & the ordering.


- Introduces the model sentence & helps Ss to
practice in groups & in pairs.


- Corrects & comments.


<b>3.Practice:(20ms)</b>
+Word cue drill:


English/ 7.00 Math/ 8.00
Literature/ 8.40 History/ 9.35
Geography/ 10.15


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


Listen and work in individially
-Marking the vocabularies in order.
<b>-</b> Giving their ordering.


3. English 4.Math 1.Literature
5.History 2.Geography 6.Monday
- Reading the text & practicing the model
in groups & in pairs.


- Checking the ordering.
* Model sentence


-What do we have today ? (?)


- We have English (+).


- I don’t have my timetable (-).


<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
-Correcting the pronunciation.
* Example exchange:


S1: <i>What do we have today ?</i>
<i> S2: We have English.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(59)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=59>

<b>4.Further practice:(7ms)</b>
+Mapped dialogue:


What...today? History
What time....start? 7.50


Do we...literature... 8.40 No, ...English
What time...finish... 9.25


What .... at 9.35? Geography
Do we....math? yes, ...1015


- Listening to the dialogue.


- Practicing the dialogue in chorus.
- Practicing the dialogue in pairs.
-Correcting pronunciation & the


mistakes


Example exchange:


S1: What do we have today ?
S2: We have history.


S1: What time does it start ?
S2: At 7.15


S1: Do we have literature at 8.40 ?
S2:No, we don’t. We have English.
S1: What time does it finish ?


S2: At 9.25
<b>III.Consolidation:(1m)</b>


Asks the way to use Have/ Do not have


- Asks Ss to give the questions & answers used to ask & answer the school timetable:


<i>-What do we have today ? (?)</i>


<i>- We have English (+).</i>


<i>- I don’t have my timetable (-).</i>
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>


- Study the model sentence.



- Exercise: write about your school timetable.
- Prepare the calendar on page 59.


<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
...


Preparing's day: 2/11/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 5: things i do</b>


<b>Lesson: 6: Classes (C2-3) </b>
<b>Period: 30</b>


<b>A.Objectives:</b>


By the end of this lesson ss will be able to talk about the weekly timetable with has/
does not have, days of the week vocab


<b> I.Knowledge:</b>
Present vocabulary
Practice the form:


S1: When do we have math?
S2: We have it on...



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(60)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=60>

<b>C.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence


<b> II.Checking:</b> -Check the form : What do we have today?


We have{English }
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Revision:(3ms)</b>
+Slap the board:


English Math Literature


History Geography Monday
<b>2.Presentation:(12ms)</b>


+Pre teach:


Tuesday:(realia): Thø 3
Wednesday: :(realia): Thø 4
Thursday: :(realia): Thø 5
Friday: :(realia): Thø 6
Saturday: :(realia): Thø 7


Sunday: :(realia): CN


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
+Checking: Matching:


Tuesday Thø 7
Wednesday Thø 6
Thursday Thø 5
Friday CN
Saturday Thø 4
Sunday Thø 3


+Predict dialogue:(answer key C3.P.59)


-Introduces the dialogue & asks Ss to work
in pairs to predict the missing words of the
dialogue & fill in.


-Asks Ss to give their prediction.



-Introduces the dialogue & helps Ss to check
their prediction.


-Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs.
-Corrects S’s pronunciation.


Work in groups


Listen and repeat in chorus and
individially


Copy down


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


work in individially to match the words in
English with the words in VietNamese


-Predicting the missing words of the
dialogue & filling in.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(61)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=61>

Nga: When do we have...?


Ba: We have it on...and...
Nga: When do have...?
Ba: We have it on...and...
Nga: Does Lan have math on...?
Ba: ...


<b>3.Practice:(20ms)</b>
+Board drill:


- Introduces the timetable & the example
exchange & Helps Ss to practice.


- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<b>4.Production:(7ms)</b>


+Asks ss to fill in their real timetable( only
five subjects they have learn in English) in
C2 P.59


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in individual to write about their
weekly timetable.



- Asks Ss to give their timetable.
- Corrects & comments.


+Asks ss to write :


We have math on ...and..., ..


 Dialogue: ( With answer keys )
Nga: When do we have ( history ) ?
Ba: We have it on (Tuesday) &
(Thursday).


Nga: When do we have ( math ) ?
Ba: We have it on (Mon),( Wed) &
(Fri).


Nga: Does Lan have math on (Friday)?.
Ba: ( No, she doesn’t ).


Predict the missing words in groups


- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
-Correcting the pronunciation.
* Example exchange:


S1: When do we have Math ?
S2: On Monday, Wednesday &
Saturday





- Working in individual to write about
their weekly timetable.


- Giving the timetable.


* Example sentence: We have math on
., and We have English on


… … ……


.etc.




<b>III.Consolidation:(1m)</b>


Asks the way to use Has/ Does not have


- Ask Ss to give the questions & answers used to ask & answer the weekly timetable:
S1: When do we have Math ?


S2: On Monday, Wednesday & Saturday
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


<b>IV.Homework:(1m)</b>


- Study the model sentence.



- Exercise: write about your weekly timetable.


- Prepare the exercises for the grammar practice part.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(62)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=62>

<b>Week: 11</b>



Preparing's day: 7/11/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 5: things i do</b>


<b>Lesson: 7: Grammar practiceP. 60-61</b>


<b>Period: 31</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>


<b>I.Knowledge:</b>


By the end of this lesson ss will be able to practice in simple present tense, tell the
time, adjective with be, question words, school subjects, days of week


<b>II.Skill:</b>
Speaking


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting(1M)
-Check attendence



<b> II.Checking:</b> -Do not check }
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Telling the time</b>(10M)
+Realia drill:


Grammar practice:2 P.60


- Introduces the example exchange & the
picture then helps Ss to practice.


- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
+Dictatation:


T reads: 1.45, 5.30, 8.15, 8.50, 12.00, 6.20,
3.30, 11.15, 10.25, 3.5, 2.40, 6.30, 9.00, 4.35


<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .


-Correcting the pronunciation.
Example exchange:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(63)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=63>

<b>2.Question words(10m)</b>
+Grammar practice: 4 P.61
+Noughts and crosses:


Le loi street 2 floors N-G- A
Literature 5.30 Grade 6
Tuesday 7.00 I play football
Asks ss to make questions


<b>3.Adj with be (10m)</b>
Grammar practice: 3 P.61
+Word cue drill:


House school city
country street Family
living room


Example exchange
S1: Is your {house} big?
S2: Yes,it is /No it is not.
<b>4.Present simple tense(10)</b>
+Find SO who:


Name Find SO who


...gets dressed
...go to bed at 10.00


...eats a big breakfast
...have lunch


...plays volleyball after school
...does the housework


-Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in
individual to interview each other by making
the Yes / No question & fill the information
in the table.


-Examples with Ss & fill the information in
the table .


- Asks Ss to go around & ask the other.


- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments
<b>+word cue drill</b>:


Mon Tue Wed
Thur Fri Sat


-Practice in groups.


-How do you spell your name ?
-What do you have today ?
-What time do you get up ?


-Which grade are you in ?
-When do you have math ?


-What time do you go to school ?
-What do you do after school ?
-What do you do in the afternoon ?


Work in pairs


<b>-</b> Working in to work in individual to
interview each other by making the Yes /
No question & fill the information in the
table.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(64)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=64>

- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.


- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments


<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
-Correcting the pronunciation.


Example exchange:


S1: What do you have on Monday ?
S2: We have [math] & {English].
S1: Do you have [history] on Monday ?
S2: Yes, I do. / No, I don’t.


<b>III.Consolidation(2m)</b>


Do grammar practice 1 P.60 and 5-7 P.61


- Asks Ss to summarize the use of all the grammars.
<b>IV.Homework(2m)</b>


- Study the grammar & the model sentences.
- Prepare the picture on page 62.


<b>D.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 8/11/2009


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 6: places</b>


<b>Lesson: 1: Our house (A1-4)</b>



<b>Period: 32</b>


<b>A.Objectives:</b>


By the end of this lesson ss will be able to read a text about where
Thuy lives to understand the detailss and practice country vocabulary


<b> I.Knowledge:</b>


Present vocabulary


Reading a text to know more about the describing the place


<b>I.Skill:</b>


Reading


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence


<b> II.Checking:</b> -Do not check


<b> III.New lesson</b>:


<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


<b>1.Pre reading</b>(12ms)


+Pre teach:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(65)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=65>

A river:(Picture): S«ng
A tree: (Picture): C©y


A flower: (Picture) : Bơng hoa
A rice paddy: (Picture): Cánh đồng
A park: (Picture): Công viên


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
+Checking: What and where:


A lake A river A tree
A flower A rice paddy A park
+Open prediction:


<b>What are near Thuy|<sub>s house?</sub></b>


<b>2.While reading(20ms)</b>



+Check their predictions: Asks ss to read the
text in A1 P.62: Our house


+Ordering vocabulary: P.62:


T reads thesecond bubble aloud: “ It is
beautiful here .There is a river and……near
our house.”


Answer key: a lake-2 Trees-4
A river-1 Flowers-5
A rice paddy-6 A park-3
+Matching: Asks ss to read the text again and
guess the meaning of these words from
context and match(with anwer key)
Near Khách sạn
A yard Xinh đẹp
Beautiful Gần
A hotel Sân


+Comprehension questions: A1P.62
Questions: a-f


-Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work
in pairs to answer. Then give the keys.


-Corrects & comments.


 Questions:
1./ How old is Thuy ?



- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


-Ss enjoy the game.


- Predicting “What’s near Thuy’s house”
& write 3 things in their books.


- Giving the prediction.
- Reading the text<b> .</b>


- Checking the prediction


-Matching the meaning of the words from
the context


<b>-Comparing & giving the information. </b>


-Working in pairs to answer. Then giving
the keys.


 Answer:



1./ She is twelve years old.
2./ She is a student.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(66)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=66>

2./ What does she do ?


3./ What’s her brother’s name ?
4./ How old is he ?


5./ Where does Thuy live ?


6./ What’s there, near Thuy’s house<i><b> ?</b></i>


<b>3.Post reading (7ms)</b>
+Picture drill:P.62 or P.63


- Introduces the pictures 0n page 62/63 & the
example exchange & Helps Ss to practice.
- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .


-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments
+Write it up: A3 P.63


4./ He is twenty.



5./ Thuy lives in a house.


6./ A lake, a rice paddy, a park, a river, a
hotel


<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
*Example exchange:


A: What’s that ?
B: It’s a [river].
A: What are those ?
B: They are [trees].
<b>III.Consolidation(3ms)</b>


Asks again vocabulary


- Asks Ss to give the questions & answers used to ask & answer about the things:
A: What’s that ?


B: It’s a [river]. A: What are those ?B: They are [trees].
- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


<b>IV.Homework(2ms)</b>


- Study the vocabulary & the exchange.
- Exercise: write what’s near your house.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>



...
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 9/11/2009


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 6: places</b>


<b>Lesson: 2: Our house (A2,3,5)</b>


<b>Period: 33</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>


<i><b>- </b></i>Helps Ss to practice in Simple present tense & WH – questions with He / She to
talk about other people’s daily routines. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk
about other people’s daily routines.


<b> I.Knowledge:</b>
Present vocabulary


Reading a text to know more about the describing the place
<b>I.Skill:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(67)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=67>

<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence


<b> II.Checking:</b> -Do not check


<b> III.New lesson:</b>


<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>


<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 20 M.</b>
<b>1.Vocabulary</b>:


(to) listen to music; nghe nh¹c (picture)
(to) watch TV; xem ti vi (picture)


(to) do the housework; làm bài tập về nhà
(to) read. đọc (picture)


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
+Check vocabulary:


R.O.R



<b>2. Ordering vocabulary: </b>


-Introduces the words & ask Ss to copy
down. Then reads the sentences in unorder
& asks Ss to listen & take note the right
order.


-Helps Ss to check & corrects.


*Teacher reads: Every morning, Lan gets up
& listens to music. Every afternoon she
comes home & does the houseworks. Then
she watches TV. Every evening she reads &
does her homeworks.


<b>3. Presentation text: A31/P53.</b>


- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the text.
- Asks Ss to read the text in individual.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<b>4. Comprehension questions: A4-P53</b>
-Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work
in pairs to answer. Then give the keys.


-Corrects & comments.


 Questions:


1./ What does Lan do after school ?
2./ What does Ba do after school ?


3./ What does Thu do after school ?
4./ What does Nam do after school ?


-Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Copying the words & Correcting the
pronunciation.


-Enjoying the game.


- Copying down the words listening to the
sentences & take note the right order.


- Checking & correcting
*Answer keys:


1..(to) listen to music; 3. (to) watch TV;
2.(to) do the houseworks; 4.(to) read


- Reading the dialogue in individual.
-Correcting the pronunciation.
*Model sentence:


- What does Ba do after school ?
– He watches TV.



-Working in pairs to answer. Then giving the
keys.


 Answer:


1./ Lan does the houseworks .
2./ Ba watches TV.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(68)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=68>

4./ Nam listens to music.
<b>II.PRACTICE Time: 10 M.</b>


<b>5. Picture drill. A3 - P53.</b>


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.


- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .


-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
<b>*Model sentence:</b>



- What does [Ba / Lan] do after school ?
–[ He/She] watches TV.


<i><b> </b></i>


<b>III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M</b>
<b>6. Noughts & Crosses</b>:


-Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in
groups to choose the cue & make the
question & the answer.


- Corrects & comments.


- Working in groups to choose the cue & make
the question & the answer.


*Example exchange:


S1: What does Ba do every morning?
S2: [ He gets dresses ].


He / play game She / brush her teeth Lan / do the house works


Ba / get dressed Nam / go to school Thu / do her homeworks


She / wash her face He / have breakfast Mai / listen to music


<b>IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):</b>



- Asks Ss to give the model sentence used to talk about other’s daily routine:
- What does [Ba/Lan] do after school ?


–[ He/She] watches TV.


- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


<b>V.Homeworks: (Time: 2M)</b>


- Study model sentence & the vocabulary.


- Write about your family members daily routine.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(69)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=69>

<b>WEEK: 12</b>


Preparing's day: 11/11/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 6: places</b>


<b>Lesson: 3: In the city(B) P.65-67.</b>


<b>Period: 34</b>
<b>A.Objectives: : </b>


- Helps Ss to read a text about where Minh lives. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able
to understand the details & town vocabulary & prepositions of place.



<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
Present vocabulary


Reading a text to know more about the describing the place
<b>II.Skill:</b>


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence


<b>II.Checking</b>: -Do not check
<b>III.New lesson</b>:


TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS


<b>I.PRE-READING Time: 10 M.</b>
<b>1.Vocabulary: </b>


a (book) store (n); tiƯm s¸ch (picture)
a restaurant (n); nhµ hµng (picture)
a temple (n); miÕu thê (picture)
a hospital (n); bÖnh viÖn (picture)
a factory (n); nhà máy (picture)
museum (n); bảo tàng (picture)


a stadium (n). sân vận động (example)


- Introduces the words by explaining the


meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>+Check vocabulary.</b>


-Slap the board


<b>2. True / False prediction: B4-P49</b>.


-Introduces the statements & ask Ss to work
in pairs to predict what is near Minh’s house.
-Asks Ss to compare their prediction.


-Asks Ss to give their prediction.
-Comments.


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.



-enjoying the game.


- Working in pairs to predict.
- Comparing their prediction.
-Giving their prediction.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(70)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=70>

*Answer key:


1../ T; 2./ F; 3./ T; 1./ There is a restaurant.2./ There is a lake..
3./ There is a hospital.
<b>II.WHILE-READING Time: 20 M.</b>


<b>3. Presentation text: B1-P65.</b>


- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text.
- Asks Ss check their prediction.


- Corrects & comments.


<b>4. Comprehension questions: B1-P66.</b>
-Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work
in pairs to choose the True / False statements
& complete the sentences.Then give the
keys.


-Corrects & comments.


 True / False statements: B1-P66
1./ Minh lives in the country.



2./ There are four people in his family.
3./ Their house is next to a bookstore.
4./ There is museum near their house.


 Complete the sentences:


1./ Minh & his family live in the ...


2./ On the street, there is a...,a...& a...
3./ His mother works in a...


4./ His father work in a ...


- Reading the text .


- Checking the prediction.


-Working in pairs to answer. Then giving the
keys.


5./ Minh’s mother works in a factory.
6./ Minh’s father works in a hospital
Answer key:


1../ F; 2./ T; 3./ F; 4./ T; 5./ F; 6./ F;
Answer key:


1./ Minh & his family live in the CITY.



2./ On the street, there is a RESTAURANT, a
BOOKSTORE & a TEMPLE.


3./ His mother works in a HOSPITAL.
4./ His father work in a FACTORY.
<b>III.POST -READING (Time: 10 M)</b>


<b>6. Dictation: B3 - P67.</b>


- Reads the words in the box & asks Ss to
listen & rewrite the words they hear.


- Asks Ss to compare their copying.


- Reads the words again to help Ss to check.
- Asks Ss to give the words they copied.
-Corrects & comments


- Listening & rewriting the words they hear.
- Comparing their copying.


- Checking the words.


-- Asks Ss to give the words they copied.


a Museum Stadium Temple Hospital


b Restaurant Store Bookstore Factory


c Park River Lake Yard



d Hotel House Street Tree


<b>IV. CONSOLIDATION ( TIME: 2M) ):</b>


- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


<b>V. Home works : (time: 2m)</b>


- Study the vocabulary & the answer.


- Exercise: write about your house and you family members.
- Prepare the place vocabulary.


<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
Preparing's day: 14/11/2009


Teaching's day: 6G:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(71)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=71>

<b>Lesson: 4: Around the house (C1-2) P.68-69</b>


Period: 35
<b>A.Objectives: : </b>


- Helps Ss to practice in more preposition of places: IN FRONT OF; TO THE LEFT/
RIGHT OF; BEHIND. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use preposition to


describe the position of the house.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


-Present vocabulary: in front of; to the left/ right of; behind.
-Preposition of places.


-Reading a text to know more about the describing the place
<b>II.Skill:</b>


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence


<b>II.Checking:</b> -Do not check
<b>III.New lesson</b>:


TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS


<b>I.PRESENTATION (Time: 15 M.)</b>
<b>1.Vocabulary: </b>


in front of:((prep.) ë phÝa tríc (example)
behind(prep.) phÝa sau (relia)


to the left/ right of: (prep.): phía bên trái/ bên
phải.(example)



- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>+Check vocabulary.</b>


-R.O.R


<b>2. Board drill: </b>


- Draws the house with a tree & practice the
example exchange with Ss in groups & in
pairs.


- Asks Ss to practice in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & mistakes.
* Example exchange;


S1: Where is the tree ?
S2: It’s [next to] the house.
<b>3. Presentation text: C1 - P68.</b>


- Introduces the text & helps Ss to read in


groups & in pairs.


- Check S’s reading


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & mistakes.


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.


- Practicing in groups & in pairs by repeating
the position of the tree.


-Enjoyng the game.


- Corrects the pronunciation & mistakes.
* next to the house


near the house
in front of the house
behind the house
to the left of the house
to the right of the house
- Reading the text in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects the pronunciation & mistakes.
<b>II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M.</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(72)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=72>

-Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work
in pairs to answer. Then give the keys.


-Corrects & comments.


 Questions:


1./ Where is the yard ?
2./ Where are the tall trees ?
3./ Where are the mountains ?
4./ Where is the well ?


5./ Where are the flowers ?
6./ Where is the house ?
<b>5. Picture drill. C1 - P68.</b>


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.


- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .


-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


-Working in pairs to answer. Then giving the


keys.


 Answer:


1./ It’s in front of the house ?
2./ They are behind the house ?
3./ They are behind the tall trees ?
4./ It’s in to the left of the house?
5./ They are to the right of the house ?
6./ It’s behind the yard ?


- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
*Example exchange:


S1: Where are the [mountains] ?
S2: They are [behind] the tall trees.


<b>III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M</b>
<b> 6. Noughts & Crosses:</b>


-Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in
groups to choose the cue & make the
sentences about Thuy’s house (& Minh’s
house).


- Corrects & comments.



- Working in groups to choose the cue & make
the sentences about Thuy’s house (& Minh’s
house).


 Example:


- Near Thuy’s house there is a lake
- Next to Minh’s house there is a store.


A lake - ( a store ) A hotel - ( a stadium ) A yard - ( a temple )


Trees -( a street ) A street - ( a hospital ) A park - ( a factory )
A rice paddy - ( museum ) A river - ( trees ) Flowers - ( restaurant )
<b>IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):</b>


-Asks Ss to give the model sentence used to ask the position of thing near their house & the
preposition of places:


S1: Where are the [mountains] ?
S2: They are [behind] the tall trees.
-Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


<b>V.Homeworks: ( Time: 2M</b>


- Study model sentence & the preposition.
- Write about thing near your house.


- Prepare the picture on page 70.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>



...
...
...
Preparing's day: 14/11/2009


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 6: places</b>


<b>Lesson: 5: Around the house (C4-5) P.68-69</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(73)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=73>

- Helps Ss to practice in “WHERE IS/ WHERE ARE...” questions & answer with
town vocabulary & preposition of place to describe a street. By the end of this lesson, Ss
will be able to describe a street


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


: - “WHERE IS/ WHERE ARE...”


-Reading a text to know more about the describing the place
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence


<b>II.Checking</b>: -Do not check


<b> </b>III.New lesson:


TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS


<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.</b>
<b>1.Vocabulary:</b>


the drug store: tiệm thuốc tây (picture)
the toystore: tiệm đồ chơi (picture)


the movie theater: Rạp chiếu phim (picture)
the police station: Đồn công an (picture)
the bakery: Tiệm bánh mỳ (picture)
between(prep.) ở giữa (rexample)
opposite(prep.) đối diện (example)


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>+Check vocabulary</b>.


-Slap the board



<b>2. Presentation text: C3 - P70.</b>


- Introduces the text & helps Ss to read in
groups & in pairs.


- Check S’s reading & Corrects S’s
pronunciation & mistakes.


.


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.


-Enjoying the game.


- Reading the text in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects the pronunciation & mistakes.
<b>II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M.</b>


<b>3. Picture drill. C4 a) - P70.</b>


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.



- Reads the first model for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .


-Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<b>4. Guessing game: C4 b) - P71. </b>


- Asks Ss to write a place in the picture on


- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
*Example exchange:


S1: Where are the [...] ?
S2: It’s opposite the...


It’s between the ...and the...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(74)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=74>

page 70 on a piece of paper.


- Asks Ss to make Yes/ No – questions to
guess the place in the paper & change the
role.


- Comments the game.



 Example:


It’s opposite the movie theater. What is it ?
It’s is the police station.


Yes, that’s right.


a piece of paper.


- Making Yes/ No – questions to guess the
place in the paper & change the role.


* Statements:


1./ It’s opposite the bakery.


2./ it’s between the bakery & the drugstore.
3./ It’s next to the bakery.


4./ It’s opposite the bookstore.
5./ It’s next to the movie theater.
<b>III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M</b>


<b>5. Survey: C5 -P71.</b>


-Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in
pairs to interview each other about the places
near their house & take note the information
& fill in the table.



-Asks Ss to report the information.
- Corrects & comments.


- Working in pairs to interview each other
about the places near their house & take note
the information & fill in the table.


-Reporting the information.
* Example exchange:


S1: What’s [in front of] your house ?
S2: [ A rice paddy].


Name In front of be hind opposite to the left of to the right of Near


<b>IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):</b>


-Asks Ss to give the questions & model sentence used to ask & answer the position of
things near the house & the preposition of places:


S1: Where are the [...] ?
S2: It’s opposite the...


It’s between the ...and the...
-Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


<b>V.Homeworks: (TIME: 2M)</b>


- Study model sentence & the questions.



- Consolidate all the model sentences & the grammars & redo the exercise
in the student’s book to prepare for the forty-five minute test.


<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...


<b>WEEK: 13</b>


Preparing's day: 15/11/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(75)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=75>

<b>Time: 45minutes</b>
<b>Period: 37</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>


<b>I.Knowledge:</b>


Check their knowlegde from untit 1 to unit 6 by doing a paper test
<b>II.Skill:</b>


Writing


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting


-Check attendence



<b> II.Checking:</b> -Not check
<b> III.New lesson:</b>


I.C hoose the best answer : a, b,c or d? (2,5M)
<b>1</b>.This is my...


<b>a</b>.hello <b>b</b>.hi <b>c</b>.family <b>d</b>.fine


<b>2.</b>We are in the ...


<b>a</b>.living room <b>b</b>.window <b>c</b>.table <b>d</b>.door


<b>3.</b>There are four...in my family: my father, my mother, my brother and I.


<b>a</b>.dogs <b>b</b>.people <b>c</b>.window <b>d</b>.chairs


<b>4</b>. My mother is thirty-five...old.


<b>a</b>.year <b>b</b>.years <b>c</b>.age <b>d</b>.ages


<b>5</b>. She is a...


<b>a</b>.doctors <b>b</b>.engeneer <b> c</b>.teachers <b>d</b>.student


<b>6.</b> We...on Tran Hung Dao street..


<b>a</b>.address <b>b</b>.is <b>c</b>.live <b>d</b>.are


<b>7.</b> ...are you? I am fine, thanks.



<b>a</b>.Where <b>b</b>.what <b>c</b>.How <b>d</b>.Who


<b>8.</b> Is this ... friend? -Yes, he’s my friend.


<b>a</b>.his <b>b</b>.her <b>c</b>.my <b>d</b>.your


<b>9.</b> This is...eraser ?


<b>a.</b> on <b>b</b>. an <b>c. </b>a <b>d</b>.in


<b>10</b>. What is your...? -My name is Lan.


<b>a</b>.name <b>b</b>.student <b>c.</b>teacher <b>d</b>.friend


III.Match the pairs of sentences (1,5M)


A B


<b>1.</b>What is this? a. Yes,it is.


<b>2</b>.Are these your pens? b. It’s a book.


<b>3.</b>Is that your house? c.I live on Tran Phu street.
<b>4.</b>Who is that? d. No, it isn’t. It’s his ruler
<b>5.</b>Where do you live? e. No, there aren’t.


<b>6.</b> Is this your ruler? f. That’s Mai
III.Write the words for the numbers. ( 1 M )



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(76)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=76>

My (1) ………is Lan. I (2) ……… twelve years old. I am
(3) ……….. student and I am (4) ………. grade 6. I am now live
(5) ………….. Huong Phung. There (6) ……….…. four people in my family.
V.Complete these sentences. (2M).


a./ Come……….…; b./ ………morning ;
c./ Sit ………..…; d./ ……….your book ;
e./ Open ………book ; f./ ………afternoon ;
g./ ……….up ; h./ ……….. night ;
VI.Write the questions and the answer with “HOW MANY” (1M).


a./ board / one: ………..……….
…;


b./ students /twenty


:…….………...………..………..….;
c./ ruler / three: ………...………..……..………..……….
…;


d./ school – bag: ….………..………..……….
…;


VII.Put the words in the corects order. (0,5m)
<b>1</b>. / many / how / are / people / there / ? /.


...
<b>2 </b>. / my / this /teacher / is / .


...



THE END


<b>Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
Preparing's day: 16/11/2009


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Trả bài kiểm tra 1 tiÕt</b>
<b>Time: 45minutes</b>


<b>Period: 38</b>
<b>A.Objectives:</b>


<b>I.Knowledge:</b>


-By the end of this lesson, students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from
the text.


<b>II.Skill:</b>
Writing


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>
<b>I.Settlement:</b> -Greeting


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(77)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=77>

<b>Teacher/<sub> s activities</sub></b> <b><sub>Students</sub>/ <sub> activities</sub></b>


I.Choose the best answer : a, b,c or d? (2,5M)


Key


<b>1</b>.How many peolpe are ...?
1:...


<b>a</b>.this <b>b</b>.that


<b>c</b>.there <b>d</b>.they


<b>2.</b>We are ... the living room.
<b>a</b>.in <b>b</b>.on


<b>c</b>.at <b>d</b>.into


<b>3.</b>There ... four peolpe in my family: my
father, my mother, my brother and I.3:...


<b>a</b>.is <b>b</b>.are


<b>c.</b>am <b>d</b>.does


<b>4</b>. ...is that? - That is Lan.


<b>a</b>.Where <b>b</b>.what


<b>c</b>.How <b>d</b>.Who


<b>5</b>. She is a...



<b>a</b>.doctors <b>b</b>.engeneer


<b> c</b>.teachers <b>d</b>.student
<b>6.</b> We...on Tran Hung Dao
street..


<b>a</b>.lives <b>b</b>.is


<b>c</b>.live <b>d</b>.are


<b>7.</b> ...are you? I am fine, thanks.


<b>a</b>.Where <b>b</b>.what


<b>c</b>.How <b>d</b>.Who


<b>8.</b> Is this ... friend? -Yes, he’s
my friend.


<b>a</b>.his <b>b</b>.her


<b>c</b>.my <b>d</b>.your


<b>9.</b> This is...eraser


<b>a.</b> on <b>b</b>. an


<b>c. </b>a <b>d</b>.in



<b>10</b>. What ...your name? -My name is
Lan.


<b>a</b>.is <b>b</b>.are


<b>c.</b>am <b>d</b>.does


II.Match the pairs of sentences (1,5M)


A B


<b>1.</b>What is this? a. Yes,it is.
<b>2</b>.Are these your pens? b. It’s a book.
<b>3.</b>Is that your house? c.I live on


Tran Phu street.
<b>4.</b>Who is that? d. No, it isn’t.


It’s his ruler
<b>5.</b>Where do you live? e. No, they aren’t.
<b>6.</b> Is this your ruler? f. That’s Mai


<b>Answer:</b>
1.c


2.a
3.b


4.d
5.d



6.c


7.c
8.a


9.b


10.a


Key:


1:...b... 2:...e...
3:...a... 4:...f...
5:...c... 6:...d...


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(78)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=78>

<b>III.Write the words for the numbers. ( 1 M )</b>
<b>a</b>. 15 = ...;


<b>c</b>. 28 = ...
<b>b</b>. 30 = ...;


<b>d</b>. 59 = ...


<b>III. Write the dialogues in the correct order</b>.
<b>(1m)</b>


Children: We’re fine, thank you. How are
you?



Miss Hoan: <i>Good afternoon, children.</i>


Children: Bye.


Miss Hoan: Fine, thanks. Good bye.
Children: <i>Good afternoon, Miss Hoan</i>.
Miss Hoan: How are you today?


<b>IV. Read. Then write the answer</b>.(2ms)
I am Nam. This is my family. We are in
our yard. There are five people in my family:
my father, my mother, my brother, my sister
and me. My father is forty-two. He is a doctor.
My mother is thirty-nine. She is a nurse. My
brother is ten. My sister is twelve. They are
students.


1. How many people are there in his family?
2.How old is his father?


3.what does he do?


4what does his mother do?


<b> VI.Put the words in the corects order. (2ms)</b>
<b>1</b>. / many / how / are / people / there / ? /.


...
<b>2 </b>. / my / this /teacher / is / .



...
<b>3</b>. / an / he / engineer / is /.


...
<b>4</b>. /name/ her/ is / Nga/.


...
THE END


b.twenty-eight
c.thirty


d.fifty-nine
=>


Miss Hoan: Good afternoon, children.
Children: Good afternoon, Miss
Hoan.


Miss Hoan: How are you today?


Children: We’re fine, thank you. How
are you?


Miss Hoan: Fine, thanks. Good bye.
Children: Bye.


1There are five people in my family.
2.He is forty-two.



3. He is a doctor.
4.She is a nurse.


1.How many people are there?
2.This is my teacher.


3.He is an engeneer
4.Her name is Nga.


<b>IV.Homework:</b>


-Prepare new lesson: Unit 1: A1-2
<b>D.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...


Preparing's day: 17/11/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 7: The world of work</b>
<b>Lesson 1: Is your house big? (A1-2)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(79)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=79>

<b>A.Objectives</b>: :


- Helps Ss to listen to a dialogue & read a letter about a house. By the end of this
lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail of the dialogue & the letter.



<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


: -Reading and listening a text to know more about the describing the place
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence


<b>II.Checking</b>: -Do not check
<b> </b>III.New lesson:


TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS


I.PRE-LISTENING Time: 5 M.


1.True / False statement prediction: (Grid)
- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work
in pairs to predict which the statements is
true or false.


- Asks Ss to compare the keys give the keys
& Comments


- Working in pairs to predict which the
statements is true or false.


- Comparing & Giving the keys.



Yes No


…big ? √


…small ? √


…a yard ? √


…a well ? √


…flowe s ?




… trees ? √


II.WHILE-LISTENING Time: 10 M:
2. Presentation dialogue: A1-P72.


- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue & get the details.


- Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue & check
the prediction & Corrects.


- Listening to the dialogue & getting the
details.


- Listening to the dialogue & checking the


prediction.


III.PRE-READING Time: 10 M
3. Vocabulary: Slap the Board.


a garden (n);
a vegetable (n);
a photo (n).


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(80)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=80>

4.True / False statement prediction:



- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work
in pairs to predict which the statements is
true or false.


- Asks Ss to compare & give the keys &
Comments..


* Answer keys:


1. T; 2. F; 3. F; 4. T;


- Working in pairs to predict which the
statements is true or false.


- Comparing & Giving the keys.
* Statements:


1. The house is in the country.
2. There is a river near the house.


3. There’re trees to the left of the house.
4. There’re two gardens.


IV.WHILE-READINGTime: 10 M
5. Presentation text: A2-P73.


- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the letter &
get the details.


- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the letter.


- Corrects comments.


6. Comprehension questions: A2/P73.


- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work
in pairs to match the questions to the
answers.


- Helps Ss to correct & comments.


a. Is there a flowers garden in front of the
house ?


b. Is the house beautiful ?


c. Is there a flowers garden behind the
house?


d. Is there a lake to the right of the house?
e. Is Nga in the city ?


- Reading the letter & get the details.
- Giving the main idea of the letter.


- Working in pairs to match the questions
to the answers.


- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting



A. Yes, it is.
B. No, it isn’t.
C. No, she isn’t.
D. Yes, there is..
E. No, there isn’t.


 Answer:


a –D; b – A; c – E; d – E;
e – C.


V.POST-LISTENING & READING
Time: 5 M


7. Transformation writing:


- Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to
work in individual to change the underlined
information to describe their own house &
then draw a picture of it as a photo .


- Asks Ss to give their information &
comments.


- Writing in individual & giving the
information.


* My house:



There’s a flowers garden in front of the
house. There’s a vegetable garden behind
the house. To the left of the house, there’s
a lake. To the right of the house, there are
tall trees. Here is a photo.


IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):


- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V. Homeworks ( Time: 2 M ):


: - Study the vocabulary & the content of the letter.
- Prepare the picture on page 74.


<b>C.Can improved:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(81)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=81>

<b>WEEK: 14</b>


Preparing's day:20 /11/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 7: The world of work</b>
<b>Lesson 2: Is your house big? (A3-5)</b>


<b>Period: 40</b>
<b>A.Objectives</b>: :


- Helps Ss to practice in facilities vocabulary with ”IS THERE A/ ARE THERE
ANY…?” & short answer to describe the town. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to
describe the town where they live.



<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


: -Reading and listening a text to know more about the describing the place
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence


<b>II.Checking</b>: -Do not check
<b> </b>III.New lesson:


TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS


I.PRESENTATION Time: 20 M.
1. Vocabulary: Slap the Board
a bank (n);


a clinic (n);
shops


a post office (n);
a supermarket (n);


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.



- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words
2. Presentation dialogue: A1-P72.


- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue.


- Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in pairs.
- Introduces the model sentence & helps Ss


.





- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


- Practicing the dialogue in pairs
-Correcting the pronunciation.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(82)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=82>

to practice.


- Checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


* Model sentence:


- Is there a yard ? - Yes, there is.
well ? - No, there isn’t.
-Are there any flowers ? – Yes, there are.
trees ? – No, there
aren’t.


II.PRACTICE Time: 10 M.
3. Picture drill: A3b) – P74.


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.


- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs .



- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation
* Example exchange:


S1: Is there [a hotel] near your house ?
S2: Yes, there is. / No, there isn’t.


S1: Are there any [shops] near your house
?


S2: Yes, there are. / No, there aren’t.
III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M


4. Survey:


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in groups to ask & answer about the
other’s house & take note the information
into the table.


- Asks Ss to compare & report the
information.


- Comments S’s information.



- Working in groups to ask & answer
about the other’s house & taking note the
information into the table.


- Comparing & reporting the information.


Name
There is a lake………..


There are flowers……….
There is a well…………
There are tall trees…………
There is vegetable garden………..
There are shops………….


IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):


- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homework : ( Time: 2 M ):


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(83)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=83>

- Prepare the picture on page 76 & read the texts at home.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
Preparing's day:21 /11/2009


Teaching's day: 6G:



<b>Unit 7: The world of work</b>
<b>Lesson 3: town or country? (B1-3)</b>


<b>Period: 41</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>: :


- Helps Ss to read a text about Ba’s & Chi’s house to understand the differences
between town & country. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail
of the text & compare the life in city & the country.


-Helps Ss to practice in integrated skill to describe the place where they live. By the
end of this lesson, Ss will be able to describe the place where they live.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


: -Reading and listening a text to know more about the describing the place


<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence


<b>II.Checking</b>: -Do not check



<b> III.New lesson:</b>


TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS


I.PRE-READING Time: 10 M.
1. Vocabulary: RoR.


a market (n);
an apartment (n);


paddy field = rice paddy (n);
noisy ≠ quiet (adj);


a zoo (n);


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(84)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=84>

meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Kim’s game: B1 – P76/77.


- Introduces the pictures & asks Ss to look at
the pictures to remember things in these
picture.


- Hides the pictures & asks Ss to talk about
the things they saw. Using this model
sentences:


- Comments the game.


- Looking at the pictures to remember things
in these picture.


- Talking about the things they saw. Using
the model sentences:


* Model sentences:


1) + “There’s a zoo, a post office…..”
+ “There’s a lake, a river…..”
2)S1: Do you live in town ?
S2: No. I live in the country.
S1: Does he live in town ?
S2: No. He lives in the country.


II.WHILE-READING Time: 20 M


3. Presentation text: B1 – P76/77.


- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the texts
about Ba’s & Chi’s house & get the details.
- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the letter.
- Corrects comments.


4. Comprehension questions: B1 – P76.
- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work
in pairs to ask & answer the questions to the
answers.


- Helps Ss to correct & comments.
* Questions:


a. Does Ba live in town ?
b. Does he live in a house ?
c. Is it noisy ?


d. Does Chi live in town ?
e. Are there any stores ?
f. Is it quiet ?


- Reading the letter & get the details.
- Giving the main idea of the letter.


- Working in pairs to ask & answer the
questions to the answers.



- Giving the answer keys.


- Correcting the answer keys &Commenting
* Answer keys:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(85)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=85>

III.POST- READING Time: 10M
2. Word cue drill:


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.


- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


Town / country
House / apartment
Lake / river
Hospital / factory
*Compare:


- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .


- Correcting the pronunciation
* Example exchange:


S1: Do you live in town ?
S2: No. I live [ in the country ].
S1: Do you live near [ a lake ] ?
S2: No. I live [ near a river ].


Supermarket / market
Shop / paddy field


Zoo / museum


In town In the country


… it’s noisy


…we live in an apartment
…there aren’t any paddy fields
…there is a zoo


… there are shops
… etc.


… it’s quiet
… etc.


IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):



- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homeworks : ( Time: 2 M ):


- Study the vocabulary & the content of the texts.


- Exercise: write a short paragraph to compare the differences


between town & country base on the information you have compared .
- Prepare the pictures on page 76 & 77.


<b>C.Can improved:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(86)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=86>

Preparing's day:22 /11/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 7: The world of work</b>
<b>Lesson 4:On the movie( C1-3)</b>


<b>Period: 42</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>: :


- Helps Ss to practice in Simple present with ‘How’ questions & “by car / by bike /
by train …” to talk about transportation. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk
about their moves.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


: -Simple present with ‘How’ questions & “by car / by bike / by train …”



<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence
<b>II.Checking</b>:


Revision ( 5 M ) : Guessing game


- Asks Ss to choose a place in town
( factory; museum; post office; …) &
complete the sentences strip & play the
game in groups.


- Corrects & comments.


Model sentence: B4 – P77.


<i>S1: Do you live near a part ?</i>
<i>S2: No, I don’t.</i>


<i>S1: Do you live near a bank ?</i>
<i> S2: Yes, I do..</i>




<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>


<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.</b>
<b>1.Vocabulary:ROR:</b>


by car ;
by bus;
by bike;
by motorbike;
by train;
by plane


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the pictures on P78/79.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>2. Presentation text: C1-2/ P78-79.</b>


- Introduces & Helps Ss tolisten to the text.
- Asks Ss read the text in silence.



- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual. Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(87)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=87>

- Introduces the model exchange & helps Ss
to practice in groups & in pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


-Correcting the pronunciation.
<b>*Model sentence:</b>


<i><b>How do you go to school ?</b></i>
<i><b> does he work ?</b></i>


<i><b>I travel / go by bike.</b></i>
<i><b>He travels / goes car.</b></i>


<b>II.PRACTICE Time: 10 M.</b>


<b>3. Substitution drill: C1-2/ P78-79.</b>


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.


- Reads the first model for example & asks


Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
* 11 pictures cues:


<i>Lien; Thu; Tuan; Hoa; Huong; Mr. Nam;</i>
<i>Mrs. Lan; Mr. Ba; Miss. Hoa; Mr Kim;</i>


<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation
* Example exchange:


<i> S1: How does [Lien] go to school ?</i>
<i>S2: She goes by [bike].</i>


<i>S1: How does [Mr. Nam] travel to work ?</i>
<i>S2: He travels by [train].</i>


<b>III.</b>


<b> PRODUCTION Time: 10 M</b>


<b>4. Noughts & Crosses:</b>



- Introduces the content & helps Ss to
practice the game in two groups.


- Asks Ss to choose the name to make the
question & answer.


- Corrects & Comments the game.


- Practicing the game in two groups.


- Choosing the name to make the question &
answer.


Mrs. Dung Mrs. Lan Mr. Hai


<i>Lien</i> <i>Thu</i> <i>Tuan</i>


<i>Mr. Ba</i> <i>Mr. Kim</i> <i>Miss. Hoa</i>


<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):</b>


- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


<b>V.Homeworks: ( Time: 2M ):</b>


- Study the vocabulary & example exchange


- Read the text C4 – P80 at home & prepare the times you do your daily routine
<b>C.Can improved:</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(88)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=88>

<b>WEEK: 15</b>


Preparing's day: 25/11/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 7: The world of work</b>
<b>Lesson 5:On the movie( C4-5)</b>


<b>Period: 43</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>: :


- Helps Ss to read a text about Hoang’s daily routine for further practice in Simple
present habitual actions. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail
of the text talk about their daily routine.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
: -Simple present.


<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence
<b>II.Checking</b>:



<b> Find someone who(5m)</b>


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in groups to ask & answer about the
time & the transportation & fill the name
into the table.


- Asks Ss to compare & report the
information.


<b>- Comments S’s information.</b>


<i><b>Find someone who…</b></i> <i><b>Name</b></i>


<i>…gets up at 5.30</i>
<i>…gets up at 6.00</i>
<i>…walks to school</i>
<i>…goes to school by bus</i>
<i>…goes to school by bike</i>


<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>


<b>I.PRE-READING Time: 10 M.</b>
<b>1. Open prediction:</b>


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in individual to predict what time


Hoang does the following things.


- Asks Ss to compare & give their


- Working in individual to predict what time
Hoang does the following things.


- Comparing & giving their prediction.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(89)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=89>

prediction.


- Comments S’s prediction.


<i>He gets up</i> <i>5.30</i>


He leaves the house <i>6.30</i>


<i>School starts</i> <i>7.00</i>


<i>School ends</i> <i>11.30</i>


<i>He has lunch</i> <i>12.00</i>


<b>II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M</b>
<b>2. Presentation text: C4 – P80.</b>


- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text &
get the details & check the prediction.


- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the text.


- Corrects comments.


<b>3. Comprehension questions: C4 – P80.</b>


- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work
in pairs to match the questions to the
answers.


- Helps Ss to correct & comments.
* Questions<i>:</i>


<i>a. What time does Hoang get up ?</i>
<i>b. What time does he go to school ?</i>
<i>c. Does he go to school by car ?</i>
<i>d. Does he walk to school ?</i>
<i>e. What time do classes start ?</i>
<i>f. What time do they end ?</i>


- Reading the text & getting the details &
checking the prediction


- Giving the main idea of the letter.


- Working in pairs to match the questions to
the answers.


- Giving the answer keys.


- Correcting the answer keys &Commenting
* Answers<i>:</i>



<i>a. Hoang gets up at 5.30.</i>
<i>b. He goes to school at 6.30.</i>
<i>c. No, he doesn’t.</i>


<i>d. Yes, he does.</i>


<i>e. Classes start at 7.00.</i>
<i>f. They end at 11.30</i>


<b>III.POST- READING Time: 10 M</b>
<b>4. Survey:</b>


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in pairs to ask each other about the
time they do these things & fill the
information into the table.


- Asks Ss to compare & report the
information.


- Comments S’s information.


- Working in pairs to ask each other about the
time they do these things & filling the
information into the table.


- Comparing& reporting the information.
<i>What time ?</i>



<i>Name…</i> <i>Name…</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(90)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=90>

<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):</b>


- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


<b>V.Homeworks: ( Time: 2 M ):</b>


- Study the vocabulary & the content of the text.
- Write about your time to do your daily things.
- Prepare the picture on page 82.


<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
Preparing's day: 30/11/2009


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 8: out and about</b>


<b>Lesson 1: what are you doing?( A1-3)</b>


<b>Period: 44</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>: :


- Helps Ss to practice in Present progressive positive statements with “I/ She/ he ” to


talk about actions happening now. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about
actions happening now.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


: - Present progressive positive statements with “I/ She/ he ”


<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence
<b>II.Checking</b>:



<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>


<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.</b>


<b>1.Vocabulary:ROR:</b>


(to) play video games;
(to) ride a bike;



(to) drive;
(to) wait for.


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the pictures on P78/79.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).


- Listening to the words.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(91)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=91>

Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.


<b>2. Presentation text: A1- P82 (Top 3</b>
<b>Pictures only ).</b>


- Introduces & Helps Ss tolisten to the text.
- Asks Ss read the text in silence.


- Introduces the model exchange & helps Ss
to practice in groups & in individual.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Introduces the form & use of the grammar.



*<b>Present progressive positive statements:</b>


<b>+ Form: I/ He/ She + tobe + V-ing.</b>
<b>+ Use: Talk about happening things.</b>


- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.


- Reading the text in silence.


- Practicing in groups & in individual.
-Correcting the pronunciation.


<b>*Model sentence:</b>


<i><b>I ’m [am] playing games</b></i>
<i><b>He/ She ’s is riding a bike.</b></i>
<i><b> driving.</b></i>


<b>II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M.</b>
<b>3. Picture drill: </b>


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.


- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing


in groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


<i><b>* </b></i><b>Note</b><i><b>: using the pictures on page 82 for</b></i>
<i><b>the cues.</b></i>


<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation


<b>* Example exchange: </b>


<i><b> a) I’m [walking to school ].</b></i>


<i><b>b) He’s / She’s [waiting for a bus].</b></i>


<b>III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M</b>


<b>4. Noughts & Crosses:</b>


- Introduces the content & helps Ss to
practice the game in two groups.


- Asks Ss to choose the name to make the
question & answer.


- Corrects & Comments the game.



- Practicing the game in two groups.


- Choosing the name to make the question &
answer.


Walk to school Drive a bus Travel by bus


<i><b>Wait for a train</b></i> <i><b>Ride a bike</b></i> <i><b>Play a game</b></i>
<i><b>Go by plane</b></i> <i><b>Drive a car</b></i> <i><b>Ride a motorbike</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(92)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=92>

- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


- Asks Ss to give the form & use of the Present progressive positive statements
with “I/ She/ he ” to talk about actions happening now:


*<b>Present progressive positive statements:</b>


<b>+ Form: I/ He/ She + tobe + V-ing.</b>


<b>+ Use: Talk about happening things.</b>


<b>V. Homeworks( Time: 2 M ): </b>


- Study the vocabulary & example exchange.


- Exercise: Write five sentences about things are happening.
- Read the text A1 – P82 at home & prepare the pictures on P82.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...


...
...
Preparing's day: 1/12/2009


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 8: out and about</b>


<b>Lesson 2: what are you doing?( A2,4-7)</b>


<b>Period: 45</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>: :


<b>A.</b> - Helps Ss to practice in Present progressive with “WH - question” with she / he /
they to talk about actions happening now. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to
ask & answer about actions happening now.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


: - Present progressive positive statements with “I/ She/ he ”
-“WH - question” with she / he / they .


<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)



-Check attendence
<b>II.Checking</b>:



<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>


<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.</b>
<b>1. Presentation text: A2 / P83 .</b>


Introduces & Helps Ss tolisten to the text.
- Asks Ss read the text in silence.


- Introduces the model exchange & helps Ss


- Reading the text in silence.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(93)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=93>

to practice in groups & in individual.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
- Introduces the form & use of the grammar.
*<b>Present progressive WH- question:</b>
<b>+Form: What + tobe + I/ He/ She+ V-ing?</b>
<b> We/ You/ They </b>
<b>+ Use: Asking about things happening</b>
<b>now.</b>


<b>*Model sentence:</b>



<b>- What ‘s (is) he / she doing ?</b>
<b> are you / they</b>


<b>- He / she ‘s (is) studying.</b>
<b> I ’m (am)</b>


<b>II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M.</b>
<b>2. Picture drill: </b>


Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.


- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss in the whole class &
checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


<i><b>* </b></i><b>Note</b><i><b>: using the pictures on page 83 for</b></i>
<i><b>the cues.</b></i>


<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.


- Practicing in groups with teacher & in
closed pairs .


- Correcting the pronunciation


* Example exchange:


+ Teacher – whole class drill:
a) S1: What‘s he doing ?


S2: He is doing his homework.
+ Closed pair work drill:


b) S1: What are they doing ?
S2: They’re waiting for a bus.


<b>III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M</b>
<b>3. Answer given: A6 - P85.</b>


- Gives the answers on the board & asks Ss
to read the text in part 6 on page 85 & work
in pairs to make the questions .


- Asks Ss to compare the questions.


– Asks Ss to give the questions by role
playing in pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & Comments
the questions.


* Answer given:


a) Mr. Ha is a businessman. He is going to
Hanoi.



b) Miss. Hoa is a teacher. She is going to
school.


c) Mr. Tuan & Mrs. Vui are doctors. They
are going to the hospital.


- Reading the text in part 6 on page 85 &
working in pairs to make the questions .


- Comparing the questions.


– Giving the questions by role playing in
pairs.


- Correcting the pronunciation &
Commenting the questions.


* Question keys:


a) Who is this / Who are they ?
b) What is he / she doing ?
are they


c) Where is he/she going ?
are they


d) How is she / he traveling ?
are they



<b>IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):</b>


- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(94)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=94>

*<b>Present progressive WH- question:</b>


<b>+Form: What + tobe + I/ He/ She+ V-ing?</b>
<b> We/ You/ They </b>


<b>V.Homeworks ( Time: 2 M ):</b>


- Study the grammar & the example exchange.
- Exercise: 1-P72; 2-P72; 3-P73;


- Read the text B1 – P86 at home & prepare the pictures on P86.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...


<b>WEEK: 16</b>


Preparing's day:3 /12/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 8: out and about</b>
<b>Lesson 3: A TRUCK DRIVE ( B1)</b>


<b>Period: 46</b>



<b>A.Objectives</b>: :


- Helps Ss to read a picture story about a truck driver. By the end of this
lesson, Ss will be able to understand the main ideas & get some information about the text.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


: - Present progressive positive statements with “I/ She/ he ”
-“WH - question” with she / he / they .


<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence
<b>II.Checking</b>:


<b> III.New lesson:</b>




TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(95)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=95>

1. Vocabulary: - Matching.



a truck driver (n); quầy bán thực phẩm
a farmer (n); người lái xe tải
a foodstall; dỡ hàng xuống
(to) load chất hàng lên
(to0 unload; đến


(to) arrive at; nông dân


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning by matching the words to the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Ordering statements .


- Gives the un-order statements about the
text & asks Ss to work in groups to guess the
order of these statements.


- Asks Ss to compare their ordering.
- Asks Ss give their ordering.



- Comments S’s ordering.
* Statements:


1. going to Hanoi.
2. Meeting the farmer.
3. Having breakfast
4. Going to a farm


5. Loading vegetable in the truck
6. Unloading the truck


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Giving the meaning by matching & the
pronunciation & Correcting the mistakes.
- Copying the words.


- Working in groups to guess the order of
these statements.


- Comparing their ordering.
- Giving their ordering.


I think I read


a c


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(96)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=96>

II.WHILE-READING Time: 20 M.


3. Presentation text: B1 – P86.


- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the story
about the truck driver & get the details.
- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the letter.
- Asks Ss to check their ordering.


- Corrects comments.


4. Comprehension questions: B1 – P87.
- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work
in pairs to match the questions to the
answers.


- Helps Ss to correct & comments.
* Questions:


a. What does Mr. Quang do ?
b. Where is he going at 5.am ?
c. Who is waiting for him ?


d. Where is he taking vegetables ?
e. What is he doing at 7.00 ?
f. Where is he eating ?


- Reading story & get the details.
- Giving the main idea of the letter.
- Checking the ordering.


* Answer keys:



a: 4; b: 2; c: 5; d: 1; e: 6; f:3.


- Working in pairs to match the questions to
the answers.


- Giving the answer keys.


- Correcting the answer keys &Commenting
* Answers:


a. He is a truck driver.
b. He is going to a farm.


c. A farmer is waiting for him.


d. He’s taking vegetables at the farm
e. He is eating his breakfast.


f. He’s eating at the foodstall.


III.


FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M


5. Chain game:


- Introduces the requirements & helps Ss to
play the game in the whole class by talking
about Mr. Quang routine.



- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments
the game.


- Playing the game in the whole class by
talking about Mr. Quang routine.


-Correcting the pronunciation &
commenting the game.


* Example:


S1: Mr. Quang gets up at 5.00 in the
morning.


S2: Mr. Quang gets up at 5.00 in the
morning and he is going to a farm.


S3: …
IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):


- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V. Homework ( Time: 2 M ):


- Study the vocabulary & the main idea of the story.
- Exercise: 1-P73; 2-P74 workbook;


- Read the text C1-P89 at home & prepare the road sign.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(97)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=97>

...
Preparing's day:4 /12/2009


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 8: out and about</b>


<b>Lesson 4: ROAD SIGNS. (C1-2)</b>


<b> Period: 47</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>: :


- Helps Ss to practice in “CAN / CAN’T” statements & traffic vocabulary. By
the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about what you are allowed & not allowed to
do on the road.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
: - “CAN / CAN’T”


<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence
<b>II.Checking</b>:



<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b> TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>


<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 10M.</b>


1 Vocabulary: Slap the board.
a policeman (n);


difficult (adj);
a sign (n);
one-way (n);
(to) park;


(to) go straight.
(to) turn left / right;


Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation & gives
example.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.



- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual & Correcting the mistakes


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(98)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=98>

2. Noughts & Crosses:


- Introduces the name of the places &
divides Ss into two groups to practice by
making questions & answers about what
people doing.


- Asks S’s to give the answer keys by
role-playing in pairs.


- Corrects & comments the game.


- Working in groups to make questions &
answers about what people doing.


- Giving the answer keys by role-playing in
pairs.


- Correcting S’s pronunciation.
* Example exchange:


S1: What is he doing ?
S2: He’s driving a car..



(drive) a car (ride) a bike (walk)


(ride) a motorbike (park) (wait for ) a bus


(turn) left (go) straight (turn) right


<b>II.PRACTICE Time: 20-M</b>.<b> </b>


3. Presentation text: C1 – P89.


- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
text.


- Asks Ss read the text in silence.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
4. Comprehension questions:


- Introduces the questions & Asks Ss to
work in pairs to answer the questions.
- Asks Ss to give the answers & corrects.
* Questions:


a. What does Hoan do ?


b. Is his job difficult ?. Tell me why ?
c. What does this sign mean ?


* Note: Points to the road signs & asks Ss
to explain the meaning.



2. Picture drill:


- Introduces the example exchange &
Helps Ss to practice.


- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.
- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss in the whole class &
checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


- Reading the text in silence.
-Correcting the pronunciation.


- Working in pairs to answer the questions.
- Giving the answers & correcting.


* Answers:


a. He is a policeman.


b. Yes, it is. Because it is …….
c. You can park here.


…..


- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.



- Practicing in groups with teacher & in closed
pairs .


- Correcting the pronunciation
* Example exchange:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(99)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=99>

<b>III.</b>


<b> FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M</b>


3.Complete sentences: C2-P89-90.


- Introduces the requirements & the road
sign then asks Ss to add CAN or CAN’T to
the gap base on the signs .


– Asks Ss to give the keys by role playing
in pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & Comments
the questions.


- Adding CAN or CAN’T to the gap base on
the signs .


– Asks Ss to give the keys by role playing in
pairs.


-Correcting the pronunciation.


* Answer keys:


a. can; b. can’t; c. can; d. can’t.
IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):


- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


- Asks Ss to give the traffic vocabulary & the road signs. & explain the meaning.


V.


Homework ( Time: 2 M ):


- Study the vocabulary & the example exchange.
- Exercise: 1- 2-P75 workbook.


-Read the text C3 – P90 at home & prepare the pictures on P90 & the road signs..
<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
Preparing's day: 6/12/2009


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 8: out and about</b>


<b>Lesson 5:ROAD SIGNS. ( C1-2.)</b>



<b>Period: 48</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>: :


- Helps Ss to read a text about road signs to understand MUST & MUSTN’T
for obligation / prohibition. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the
detail of the text talk about the obligation / prohibition.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


: - MUST & MUSTN’T for obligation / prohibition.


<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(100)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=100>

<b>III.New lesson:</b>




<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>


<b>I.PRE-READING Time: 15M.</b>


1. Vocabulary: - Matching.
dangerous (adj);



an accident (n);
an intersection (n);
(to) go fast (v);
(to) warn us (v);
(to) help us (v);
(to) slow down (v);


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning by matching the words to the
meaning & Corrects the pronunciation.


2. Wordsquare:


- Introduces the wordsquare & asks Ss to
work in groups to find out the 20 words
related to the traffic.


- Asks Ss to compare & give their prediction.
- Comments S’s the game.



* Answer key:


road signs; accident; travel; us; left;
right; go fast


truck


warn; stop; turn; car; ride; go; drive;
help; straight; dangerous.


2. True / False prediction:


- Introduces the statements & asks Ss to work
in pairs to look at the pictures on page 90 &
choose the correct statements for each one


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Giving the meaning by matching & the
pronunciation & Correcting the mistakes.


- Working in groups to find out the 20 words
related to the traffic.


- Comparing & giving their prediction.


R O A D S I G N D


W K O R X H I S A



A C C I D E N T N


R U C D R L O R G


N R A E I P T A E


S T R A V E L I R


T U S L E F T G O


O R I G H T O H U


P N G O F A S T S


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(101)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=101>

- Asks Ss to compare & give their prediction.
- Comments S’s the game.


- Comparing & giving their prediction.
a. Slow down


Go straight


b. Turn left
Don’t turn left


c. Turn right
Go straight or turn left


d. Slow down


Don’t go straight
ahead
e. Park here


Don’t park here


f. Cars & trucks go here
Motorbike go here


g. Don’t go straight
Don’t turn right or left


h. Park here
Don’t park here


<b>II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M</b>


3. Presentation text: C3 – P90.


- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text & get
the details & check the prediction.


- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the text.
- Corrects comments.


* Answer keys:


- Reading the text & getting the details &
checking the prediction



- Giving the main idea of the letter.
a. Slow down b. Turn left c. Go straight or turn


left


d. Don’t go straight
ahead


e. Don’t park here f. Cars & trucks go here g. Don’t turn right or
left


h. Park here


<b>III.POST- READING Time: 10 M</b>


4. Word cue drill: C4-P91.


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.


- Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


- Repeating in chorus & in individual.


- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
* Example exchange:


S1: What does this sign mean ?
S2: You must [slow down].


IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M)


- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):


- Study the vocabulary & the content of the road signs.
- Prepare for the grammar practice.


<b>C.Can improved:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(102)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=102>

<b>WEEK: 17</b>


Preparing's day: 10 /12/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Grammar practice </b>


<b>Period: 49</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


- Helps Ss to further practice in Simple present vs. Present progressive. By the end


of the lesson, Ss will be able to use these grammars completely .


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


: - Simple present vs. Present progressive.
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence
<b>II.Checking</b>:


<b>III.New lesson:</b>


<b>TEACHER’S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>


<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 10 M </b>.


1. Revision:


- Asks Ss to give the form & use of the Simple
present vs. Present progressive


*Form:


* Present simple: S + V-s / es + O.


* Use: Talk about things happen regularly.
* Present progressive: S + tobe + V-ing.
* Use: Talk about thing happening now.
- Corrects & comments.


- Giving the form & use of the Simple
present vs. Present progressive.


- Giving example.
* Example


- I go to school.


- I am going to school.:


<b>II.PRACTICE Time 20 M .</b>


1. Present progressive with I / She / He.
* Chain game:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(103)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=103>

groups, using the past simple to talk about
their vacation.


- Asks Ss to give the answers.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


2. Present progressive with all persons
* Complete the sentences: GP 2 – P92.



- Introduces the requirement & Asks Ss to
work in pairs to use the verbs in the
parentheses to complete the sentences in
present progressive.


- Asks Ss to compare the keys.


- Asks Ss to give the keys by repeating in
chorus. Then corrects S’s pronunciation.


* Cues:


a. Minh….his bike. ( ride )
b. They ……for a bus. ( wait )
c. She ……TV. (watch )
d. We ……soccer. ( play )
e. He ……to music. ( listen )
f. They ……to school. ( walk )
g. He …… to Hanoi. ( travel )


to talk about their vacation.
- Giving the answers.


- Correcting the pronunciation.
* Model sentences:


S1: I’m watching TV.


S2: She is watching TV & I’m playing
video games.



S3: She is watching TV, he is playing video
games & I’m …etc.


-Working in pairs to use the verbs in the
parentheses to complete the sentences in
present progressive.


- Comparing the keys & give the keys.
- Correcting the keys.


* Answer keys:


a. Minh is riding his bike.
b. They are waiting for a bus.
c. She is watching TV.


d. We are playing soccer.
e. He is listening to music.
f. They are walking to school.
g. He is traveling to Hanoi.


<b>III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M.</b>


3. Present simple vs. Present progressive:
* Contrast: GP 5 – P94.


- Introduces the requirement & Asks Ss to
work in pairs to use the verbs in the
parentheses to complete the sentences in


present progressive & in simple present.


* Example:


- (play) They play volleyball everyday.
They’re playing volleyball now.
- Asks Ss to compare the keys.


- Asks Ss to give the keys
- Corrects & comments.


a. (ride) She …her bike to school.


-Working in pairs to use the verbs in the
parentheses to complete the sentences in
present progressive & in simple present.
- Comparing the keys & give the keys.
- Correcting the keys.


* Answer keys:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(104)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=104>

b. (go)
c. (walk


)
d. (drive


)


She …her bike now.



We …to school by bus everyday.
We …to school by bus now.
I …to school everyday.
I …to school now.
He … his truck.


He … his truck at the moment.


She is riding her bike now.


b. We go to school by bus everyday.
We’re going to school by bus now.
c. I walk to school everyday.


I’m walking to school now.
d. He drives his truck.


He’s driving his truck at the moment
IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):


- Asks Ss to summarize the lesson.
V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):


- Study the grammar & the modal sentence & do the exercises at home.


- Prepare for the grammars: Preposition of places; Must & Can; & Questions word for
the next grammar practice: 3- 4- 6 – 7/ P 93-94..


<b>C.Can improved:</b>



...
...
...
Preparing's day: 15 /12/2009


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Review(1) </b>


<b>Period: 50</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


- Helps Ss to further practice with making suggestions, arrangements & accepting
the invitation. By the end of the lesson, Ss can use these grammars correctly.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


: - Making suggestions, arrangements & accepting the invitation
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>



<b> </b>III. New lesson


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(105)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=105>

1. Present simple tense.
a. With (to) be:(20ms)


-T asks ss to remember the way to use the
structure,use.


-T calls some ss to go to the board and write.
-T controls and corrects with ss.


-T asks Ss to give the structures and the way to use
them.


Structure:


Khẳng định: S + (to) be +(a/an) + O.
Phủ định: S + (to) be-not +(a/an) + O.
Nghi vấn:(to) be + S +a/an + O ?.
Trả lời: Yes, S + (to)be


No, S + (to) be-not
-T asks ss to give more example


<i>b.Example:</i>


1.They are students.
2.He isnot an engineer.
3. Are they students ?


Yes, they are.
No, they aren’t
T controls and corrects.
Notes:


I + am = I’m


She,He,It + is = she’s; he’s; it’s


You, They, We + are = you’re; they’re; we’re.
2.Exercise:


-T aks ss to work in groups of 4 to do the exercises.
-T asks ss the way to do.


- T calls ss to go to the board write the answer.
-T comment and correct.


a.Điền am, is, are vào ô trống.(10ms)
1. He...a nurse.


2.They ...doctors.
3.Peter...a student.


4.I...small but my father...big.
5.Miss Mai...always early.


6. We... teachers and they
...workers.



b. Change 6 sentences into negative sentenses.
(10ms)


Example:


1. He isn’t a nurse.
2.They are not doctors.
3.Peter is not a student.
...etc.


-Ss remember and answer the
question of teacher.


-Ss give examples.
+ He is a teacher.
+ Nam isnot a student.
+ Is she tall?


Yes, she is/ No, she isn’t.
...etc


- Ss take notes.


- Ss copy the notes and learn by
heart.


Practicing in groups.
-Expected:


1. He is a nurse.


2.They are doctors.
3.Peter is a student.


4.I am small but my father is big.
5.Miss Mai is always early.
6. We are teachers and they are
workers.


-Ss go to the board write the
answer.


- Correcting the answer keys.
Practicing in groups.


-Ss go to the board write the
answer


Example:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(106)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=106>

- Introduces the way to practice & devides the class
into 2 groups to practice.


- Helps Ss to practice.


-Calls ss to go to the board to write the answer.
- Corrects & comments


3.Peter is not a student.
- Correcting the answer keys.
IV. Consolidation.(1ms)



-T calls some Ss to read again the model sentences and th cocept check.
V.Homework.(1ms)


-Preparing the simple present tense .
<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
Preparing's day: 16/12/2009


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Review(2) </b>


<b>Period: 51</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


- Helps Ss to further practice with making suggestions, arrangements & accepting
the invitation. By the end of the lesson, Ss can use these grammars correctly.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


: - Making suggestions, arrangements & accepting the invitation
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.



<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>


<b>III. New lesson</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>


<b>1.Present simple tense.</b>
a. With regular verbs.:(20ms)


-T asks ss to remember the way to use the
structure,use.


-T calls some ss to go to the board and write.
-T controls and corrects with ss.


-T asks Ss to give the structures and the way
to use them.


Structure:


Khẳng định: S + V(s/es) + O.


Phủ định: S + don’t/doesn’t + V(inf) + O.
Nghi vấn: Do/ Does + S + V(inf) + O ?.


Trả lời: Yes, S + do/does


No, S + don’t/ doesn’t.


-Ss remember and answer the question of
teacher.


-Ss give examples.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(107)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=107>

-T asks ss to give more example


<i>b.Example:</i>


1.They play chess.


2.He works in a hospital.
3. Does nam like oranges?
Yes, he does


No, he doesn’t.
T controls and corrects.
Notes:


She,He,It + V(s/es)
You, They, We + V(inf)
<b>2.Exercise: </b>


a.Put the following verbs in simple presnt.
(20ms)



-T aks ss to work in groups of 4 to do the
exercises.


-T asks ss the way to do.


- T calls ss to go to the board write the answer.
-T comment and correct.


1. The swimming bath...(open) at
9:00 and ...(close) at 18:30 every day.
2.I have a car but I...(not-use) it very
often.


3.I...(play) the piano, but
I...(not-play) very well.


4.I don’t understand the word”decide”.
What...(“decide”/ mean)?
5.I ...(work) in a bank.
Nam...(work) in an office


...etc


- Ss take notes.


- Ss copy the notes and learn by heart.


Practicing in groups.


-Expected:



1. opens...closes
2.don’t use


3.play...don’t play.
4.does the “decide” mean?
5.work...doesn’t work...


-Ss go to the board write the answer.
- Correcting the answer keys.


keys.


IV. Consolidation.(1ms)


-T calls some Ss to read again the model sentences and th cocept check.
V.Homework.(1ms)


-Preparing the simple present tense .
<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
<b>WEEK: 18</b>


Preparing's day: 17/12/2009
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Review(3) </b>



<b>Period: 52</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(108)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=108>

- Helps Ss to consolidate the grammars to prepare for the first final semester test.
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to consolidate the grammar to prepare for the first
final semester test.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


: - Making suggestions, arrangements & accepting the invitation
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>


<b> </b>III. New lesson


<b>TEACHER’S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>


I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Gaps fill: 1 / P 40.


-Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to
work in individual to fill in the gaps.


-Asks Ss to compare in pairs.


-Asks Ss to give the information.
-Corrects & comments.


-Introduces the game & helps Ss to play
in two groups by choosing the cue &
making question.


-Corrects & comments the game.


- Working in individual to fill in the gaps.
-Comparing in pairs & giving the information.
*Answer keys:


1./ am – am – are – is – are.
2./ am – is – is – are – are.


3./ a) are – am; b) is – is.
c) is – isn’t ; d) are – aren’t.
2. Noughts & Crosses:


- Playing in two groups.


They/teachers We/students She/a nurse
He/an engineer I/a student They/sister


You / 12 We/brothers She/a doctor
II.PRACTICE Time 10 M .



3. Present progressive :


- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
text.


- Asks Ss read the text in silence.


- Introduces the model exchange & helps
Ss to practice in groups & in individual.
- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.


- Introduces the form & use of the
grammar.


* Present progressive :


+ Form: I/ He/ She + tobe + V-ing.


- Reading the text in silence.


- Practicing in groups & in individual.
-Correcting the pronunciation.


*Model sentence:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(109)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=109>

We/ You/ They


+ Use: Talk about things happening
now..



III.PRODUCTION Time: 15 M.


4. Yes / No question Answer drill:
A6-P55.


- Introduces the example exchange &
Helps Ss to practice.


- Reads the first model for example &
asks Ss to repeat in chorus & in
individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s
practicing in groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation &
comments.


3. Find someone who:


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in groups using the example
exchange to ask & answer about the place
where they live & fill the name into the
table.


- Asks Ss to compare & report the
information.



- Comments S’s information.


* Example exchange: (Picture on P36)
S1: Do you / they play volleyball ?
S2: Yes, I / they do.; No, I / they don’t.
S1: Does she / he play soccer ?


S2: Yes, she / he does; No, she / he doesn’t
- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.


- Working in groups using the example
exchange to ask & answer about the place
where they live & fill the name into the table.
- Comparing & reporting the information.
* Example exchange:


S1: Do you live in town ?
S2: No, I don’t. / Yes, I do.
S1: What your name ?
S2: My name is…


S1: How do you spell it ?


Find someone who lives… Name


… in town


…in the country
… near a lake
…next to a market
…opposite a paddy field
…near a post office


IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M )
- Asks Ss to summarize the lesson.
V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(110)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=110>

- Prepare for the First final semester test.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
Preparing's day: 20/12/2009


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Review(4) </b>


<b>Period: 53</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


- Helps Ss to consolidate the grammars to prepare for the first final semester test.
By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to consolidate the grammar to prepare for the first
final semester test.



<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


- The present progressive tense.
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>


<b> </b>III. New lesson


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>


a.Structure:(10ms)


-T asks ss to remember the way to use the
structure,use.


-T calls some ss to go to the board and write.
-T controls and corrects with ss.


-T asks Ss to give the structures and the way to
use them.


Form:



Khẳng định: S + (to) be +V-ing + O.
Phủ định: S + (to)be-not + V-ing+ O.
Nghi vấn: (to) Be + S + V-ing + O ?.
Trả lời: Yes, S + (to)be


No, S + (to)be-not


Use: Diển tả một hành động đang xy ra ti
thi im núi.


*Thờng dùng với các trạng tõ nh:


Now, right now, at the moment, at present.
-T asks ss to give more example


<i>b.Example:</i>


1.They are playing chess now.
2.He is working in a hospital now.
3. Is Nam doing his homework?


-Ss remember and answer the question
of teacher.


-Ss give examples.


+ He is teaching in a school at the
moment.



+ Nam isn’t playing volleyball at
present...


+ Are you studying now?
Yes, I am/ No, I am not.
...etc


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(111)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=111>

Yes, he is
No, he isn’t
T controls and corrects.
Notes:


I+ am + V-ing


She,He,It + is + v-ing


You, They, We + are + v-ing
<b>2.Exercise: </b>


a.Put the following verbs in present
progressive tense.(20ms)


-T aks ss to work in groups of 4 to do the
exercises.


-T asks ss the way to do.


- T calls ss to go to the board write the answer.
-T comment and correct.



1. The swimming bath...(open) now
2.They...(play) the piano now
3.Lan...( not-work) in a bank at
the moment


4. Nam...(work) in an office at
present.


5.Look! It...(snow).


b. Use the verbs given in present progressive
tense to complete the following sentences.
(12ms)


-T aks ss to work in groups of 4 to do the
exercises.


-T asks ss the way to do.


- T calls ss to go to the board write the answer.


-T comment and correct.


read rain become Shine get listen


1.The cost of living...higher.


2.George now can speak French fluently. His
French...better.



3.Keep silent, please. I...to the
teacher.


4.We can go out because it...


5.Where’s your father? – He...a
newspaper in his room.


6.It’s very hot today. The
sun...above.


- Ss copy the notes and learn by heart.


Practicing in groups.


-Expected:
1. is opening
2.are playing
3.isn’t working
4.is working
5.is snowing


-Ss go to the board write the answer.
- Correcting the answer keys.


Practicing in groups.


-Ss go to the board write the answer


Example:


1. is becoming
2.is getting
3. am listening
4. is raining
5. is reading
6. is shining


- Correcting the answer keys.
<b>IV. Consolidation.(2ms)</b>


-T calls some Ss to read again the model sentences and th cocept check.
<b>V.Homework</b>.(1ms)


-Preparing the present progressive tense
<b>C.Can improved:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(112)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=112>

The first term examination
Time: 45minutes


Period: 54


(Đề và đáp án do phòng GD-ĐT Gio Linh ra)


<b>WEEK: 19</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(113)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=113>

<b>Unit 9: the body </b>


<b>Lesson 1: parts of the body.( A1-2)</b>


<b>Period: 55</b>



<b>A.Objectives</b>:


- Helps Ss to practice in nouns to talk about the parts of the body. By the end of
this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about the parts of their body.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


- The present simple tense.
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>


<b> </b>Asks Ss some questions about the function of their parts of the body.


<i><b>? What does your head/ hands/ legs/ … for ?</b></i>


- Corrects S’s answers & comments.


<b> III. New lesson :</b>


<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>



<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.</b>


<b>1.Vocabulary:</b>


<i><b> his head / chest;</b></i>


<i><b> his shoulders/ arms / hands</b></i>
<i><b> legs/ feet / fingers / toes. </b></i>


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.


<b>2. Rub out and Remember:</b>


- Introduces the words & helps Ss to read to
remember.


- Erasers the words in un-order & asks Ss to
read.



- Asks Ss to rewrite the words in the circle
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.


<b>-</b> Reading the words to remember.
- Rewriting the words in the circle.


<b>- </b>Correcting the pronunciation & the
mistakes.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(114)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=114>

<i><b> </b></i>


<i><b>his shoulders his arms his hands</b></i>
<i><b> his legs his feet his fingers </b></i>


<b>II.PRACTICE Time: 10 M.</b>
<b>3. Picture drill: A1 - P 96.</b>


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.



- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation
* Example exchange: A2-P97.
<i> S1: What is that ?</i>


<i>S2: That is his head.</i>
<i>S1: What are those ?</i>


<i>S2: Those are his shoulders<b>.</b></i>


<b>III.</b>


<b> FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M</b>


<b>3. Wordsquare:</b>


- Introduces the word-square & asks Ss to
work in groups to find out the 14 hidden


words.


– Asks Ss to give the words in two groups
by circling the words & put them into a
present progressive statement & write on the
board.


- Corrects & Comments the game.
* Answer keys:


HEAD; FINGER;SHOULDER
HANDS; FOOT.




ARMS; LEGS; CHEST; TOES


- Working in groups to find out the hidden
words.


- Giving the words in two groups by circling
the words & put them into a present
progressive statement & write on the board.


<b>H</b> <b>E</b> <b>A D O X W T</b>


<b>A</b> <b>K</b> <b>L A C T</b> <b>F</b> <b>E</b>


<b>T</b> <b>R</b> <b>A V H A</b> <b>O W</b>



<b>F</b> <b>I</b> <b>N G E R</b> <b>O</b> <b>T</b>


<b>H</b> <b>D</b> <b>R</b> <b>I</b> <b>S M</b> <b>T</b> <b>O</b>


<b>Q</b> <b>E</b> <b>M A T</b> <b>S</b> <b>T</b> <b>E</b>


<b>O</b> <b>R</b> <b>R H A N</b> <b>D</b> <b>S</b>


<b>S</b> <b>H</b> <b>O U L D</b> <b>E</b> <b>R</b>


<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):</b>


- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


<b>V. Homework: ( Time: 2 M ):</b>


- Study the vocabulary & example exchange.
- Exercise: A1- P84. Workbook.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(115)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=115>

...
...
...
...


Preparing's day: 1/1/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 9: the body </b>


<b>Lesson 2: parts of the body.( A1-2)(cont.)</b>



<b>Period: 56</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


- Helps Ss to practice in adjectives to describe physical appearance. By the end of this
lesson, Ss will be able to describe theirs physical appearance.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


- The present simple tense.
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision</b>


<b> </b>


<b> Hang man.</b>


- Introduces the symbols & asks Ss
to give the letters to form the
words.



- Corrects S’s answers & comments.


<b>--- ( fingers)</b>


<b>--- (chest) ---- (arm) </b>
<b>---- (feet) ---- (legs)</b>
<b> III. New lesson :</b>


<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>


<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.</b>


<b>1.Vocabulary:</b>


tall  short (adj);


fat  thin (adj);


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(116)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=116>

- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2
times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.



- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.


<b>2. Noughts & Crosses:</b>


- Introduces the cues & divides the class
into two groups to play the game.


- Corrects & Comments the game.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.


<b>-</b> Playing the game.


- Corrects & Comments the game.


<b>tall</b> <b>big</b> <b>Fat</b>


<b>small</b> <b>thin</b> <b>Short</b>



<b>quiet</b> <b>light</b> <b>heavy</b>


<b>II.PRACTICE Time: 10 M.</b>


<b>3. True / False repetition drill: A4 –P98.</b>


- Reads the cues & asks Ss to repeat in
chorus if the cue is true & keep silent if
the cue is false.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


<b>* Teacher:</b>


<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating if the cue is true & keep silent if
the cue is false.


- Correcting the pronunciation


<b>* Student:</b>
<i><b>P. a:</b></i>
<i><b>P. b:</b></i>
<i><b>P. c:</b></i>
<i><b>P. d:</b></i>
She’s thin
<i><b>He’s thin</b></i>
<i><b>He’s </b></i>
<i><b>small</b></i>
<i><b>She’s </b></i>
<i><b>thin</b></i>


<i><b>She’s tall</b></i>
<i><b>He’s </b></i>
<i><b>short</b></i>
<i><b>He’s tall</b></i>
<i><b>She’s tall</b></i>
<i><b>He’s fat</b></i>
<i><b>He’s </b></i>
<i><b>heavy</b></i>
<i><b>She’s </b></i>
<i><b>short</b></i>
<i><b>She’s </b></i>
<i><b>fat</b></i>
<i><b>Repea</b></i>
<i><b>t</b></i>
<i><b>Silent</b></i>
<i><b>Silent</b></i>
<i><b>Silent</b></i>
<i><b>Repeat</b></i>
<i><b>Repeat</b></i>
<i><b>Repeat</b></i>
<i><b>Silent</b></i>
<i><b>Repea</b></i>
<i><b>t </b></i>
<i><b>Repea</b></i>
<i><b>t </b></i>
<i><b>Repea</b></i>
<i><b>t</b></i>
<i><b>Repea</b></i>
<i><b>t</b></i>
<b>III.</b>


<b> FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M</b>


<b>3. Prediction: A4 – P98.</b>


- Introduces the pictures & asks Ss to
work in individual to predict the
adjectives to fill in.


- Asks Ss to compare & give their
prediction .


- Helps Ss to listen to the tape & check
their prediction.


- Working in individual to predict the
adjectives to fill in.


- Comparing & give their prediction.


<b>* Answer:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(117)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=117>

- Corrects & Comments S’s prediction.


<b>4. Grid: With answer keys.</b>


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
listen to the tape & write the order of the
people described.



- Asks Ss to compare & give their
information.


- Corrects & Comments S’s information.


- Listening to the tape & writing the order of
the people described.


- Comparing & giving their information.


<i><b>Tall ? short ? thin ? fat ?</b></i> <i><b>Listen</b></i>
<i><b>Picture a</b></i> <i><b>( thin - tall )</b></i> <i><b>4</b></i>
<i><b>Picture b</b></i> <i><b>( short – fat )</b></i> <i><b>3</b></i>
<i><b>Picture c</b></i> <i><b>( tall – fat )</b></i> <i><b>2</b></i>
<i><b>Picture d</b></i> <i><b>( short – fat )</b></i> <i><b>1</b></i>


<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):</b>


- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


<b>V. Homework: ( Time: 2 M ):</b>


- Study the vocabulary & example exchange.
- Exercise: A3 & 4- P84. Workbook.


- Prepare the pictures on P100.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...


...
...
Preparing's day: 3/1/2010


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 9: the body </b>
<b>Lesson 3: faces(b1)</b>


<b>Period: 57</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


- Helps Ss to practice in face vocabulary ( nouns & adjectives )to describe people’s
faces. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to describe their faces.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


- The present simple tense.
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(118)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=118>

- Introduces the words & asks Ss to choose the pairs of antonym adjectives.


<i><b>FAT </b></i> <i><b>TALL </b></i> <i><b>HEAVY </b></i> <i><b>BIG</b></i> <i><b>NOISY</b></i>
<i><b>THIN</b></i> <i><b>SHORT</b></i> <i><b>LIGHT</b></i> <i><b>SMALL</b></i> <i><b>QUIET</b></i>


- Corrects S’s answers & comments.


<b> </b>


<b> III. New lesson :</b>


<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>


<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.</b>


<b>1.Vocabulary:</b> <b>ROR</b>.


his eyes/ ears/ lips/ teeth
his hair/ nose/ mouth.


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the


meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.


<b>2. Slap the board.</b>


- Introduces the picture of the people’s face &
divides the class into two groups to play the
game.


- Corrects & Comments the game.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


<b>- </b>Playing the game.
- Commenting the game.



<i> His eyes his hair</i>


<i><b>His nose </b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(119)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=119>

II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M.


<b>3. Presentation text: B1 – 100.</b>


- Introduces the six pictures on page 100 (a – f)
& helps Ss to practice.


- Checks S’s practicing in individual.
- introduces the model sentence.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


- Practicing in individual.
- Correcting the pronunciation.


 <b>Model sentences:</b>


<i><b>a round face - an oval face</b></i>
<i><b>full lips - thin lips</b></i>


<i><b>long hair - short hair</b></i>


<b>III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M.</b>
<b>4. Word square.</b>


- Introduces the wordsquare & divides the


class into two groups & asks them to find out
the 17 hidden words in the square.


- Asks Ss to give the words.
- Corrects & comments.
* Answer key:


<i> hair; fat; see; the; mouth; out; heavy.</i>
<i> ear; arm; near; toe; to; feet; </i>


<i> teeth; fingers.</i>
<i> nose; eye.</i>


- Finding out the 17 hidden words in the
square.


<b>- Giving the words.</b>


<b>H A</b> <b>I</b> <b>R</b> <b>X P</b>


<b>N</b> <b>E</b> <b>F</b> <b>A</b> <b>T I</b>


<b>E</b> <b>O</b> <b>Y</b> <b>F</b> <b>E N</b>


<b>A</b> <b>B</b> <b>S</b> <b>E</b> <b>E G</b>


<b>R</b> <b>T</b> <b>H</b> <b>E</b> <b>T E</b>


<b>M O</b> <b>U</b> <b>T</b> <b>H R</b>



<b>H E</b> <b>A</b> <b>V</b> <b>Y S</b>


<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 </b>


- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


<b> V.Homework: ( Time: 2 M ):</b> <b> </b>


- Study the vocabulary.


- Exercise: B1 & 2- P85. Workbook.
- Prepare the pictures on P101.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
...
<b>WEEK: 20</b>


Preparing's day: 5/1/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 9: the body </b>
<b>Lesson 4: faces(b2-3)</b>


<b>Period: 58</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(120)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=120>

<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


- The present simple tense.
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence


<b>II- Revision Jumbled words.</b>


- Gives the jumbled words & asks Ss to put the letters into the right order to form the
correct words.


<i><b>Yees = eyes;</b></i> <i><b> hari = hair; </b></i> <i><b> cefa = face; </b></i>
<i><b>Spli = lips dreshouls = shoulders. sone = nose</b></i>


- Corrects S’s answers & comments.


<b> III. New lesson :</b>
<b> 3. New lesson :</b>


<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>


<b>I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.</b>



<b>1.Vocabulary:</b> <b>ROR</b>. <b>B2.P101.</b>


black; gray; red; blue;
brown; white; yellow; green


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.


<b>2. Finding friends:</b>


- Introduces the requirements & the table then
asks Ss to make sentences:


 <i><b>She has brown hair.</b></i>
 <i><b>She has green eyes. Etc…</b></i>


- Asks Ss to go to the board & take note their
friends appearances & Comments .



- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


- Copying the words.


- Making sentences:


 <i><b>She has brown hair.</b></i>
 <i><b>She has green eyes. Etc…</b></i>


- Going to the board & taking note their
friends appearances.


She/ has… <i><b>eyes</b></i> <i><b>hair</b></i> <i><b>lips</b></i> <i><b>teeth</b></i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(121)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=121>

<i><b>blue </b></i>
<i><b>White</b></i>
<i><b>Brown</b></i>


<i><b>red </b></i>
<i><b>green.</b></i>


II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M.



<b>3. Dialogue build: B3 – 101.</b>


- Read the dialogue & presents the symbols for
the words & asks Ss to repeat to remember the
dialogue.


- Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in groups &
in pairs.


- Asks Ss to build the dialogue.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


- Repeating the dialogue to remember.
- Practicing the dialogue in groups & in
pairs.


- Building the dialogue.


- Correcting the pronunciation & building
the dialogue.


* Dialogue:


<i>Hoa: I have a new doll.</i>
<i>Mai: What color is her hair ?</i>
<i>Hoa: It’s black.</i>


<i>Mai: What color are her eyes ?</i>


<i>Hoa: They are brown.</i>


<b>III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time: 10 M.</b>
<b>2. Picture drill: B3/ P 101.</b>


- Introduces the example exchange & the
pictures then helps Ss to practice.


- Reads the first modal for example & asks Ss
to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.


- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
<i>* Note:</i> Using pictures of the four dolls on page
101.


<i><b>- </b></i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.
* Example exchange:


<i>S1: What color is her hair ?</i>
<i>S2: It’s black.</i>


<i>S1: What color are her eyes ?</i>


<i> S2: They are brown<b>.</b></i>


<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):</b>


- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


<b>V. Homework: ( Time: 2 M ):</b>


- Study the vocabulary & the model sentences.


- Prepare the pictures on P 100 & 101 for B1 – 4 – 5 - 6.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(122)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=122>

Preparing's day: 6/1/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 9: the body </b>
<b>Lesson 5: faces(4-6)</b>


<b>Period: 59</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


- Helps Ss to further practice in body vocabulary to describe people. By the end of this
lesson, Ss will be able to use body vocabulary to describe people.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


- The present simple tense.
<b>II.Skill</b>:



Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>


<b> III. New lesson :</b>


<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>


<b>I.PRE-READING Time: 10 M.</b>
<b>1. Vocabulary: ROR.</b>


<i><b> </b></i>round – a round face;
oval – an oval face


full/ thin – full/ thin lips;
long/ short – long/ short hair<i><b>.</b></i>


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects


the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
<b>2. Prediction: B4 – P 101.</b>


- Introduces the close text & asks Ss to work
in pairs to predict the information to fill in
the gap.


- Asks Ss to give their information.
- Comments the information.
* Answer key:


<i>* Miss Chi is tall and thin. She has a round</i>
<i>face, long black hair, brown eyes, a small</i>
<i>nose, thin lips and small white teeth.</i>


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.


- Working in pairs to predict the information
& filling in the gap.



- Giving the information.


- Commenting the information.


<i>* Miss Chi is ___ and thin. She has a ___</i>
<i>face, ___ ___ hair, ___ eyes, a ___ nose, ___</i>
<i>lips and small ___ teeth.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(123)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=123>

- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the texts
about Miss. Chi & correct their prediction.
- Asks Ss to compare their information.
- Corrects comments.


<b>4. Comprehension questions: B1 – P76.</b>
- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work
in pairs to ask & answer the


- Helps Ss to correct & comments.


<i>*</i> Questions:


<i>a. Is Miss. Chi’s hair long or short ?</i>
<i>b. What color are her eyes ?</i>


<i>c. Are her lips full or thin ?</i>
<i>d. What color is her hair ?</i>
<i>e. Is her nose big or small ?</i>


-Reading the texts about Miss. Chi &


correcting their prediction.


- Comparing their information.


- Working in pairs to ask & answer the
questions.


- Correcting the answer keys & Commenting.


<i>* </i> Answer keys:


<i>A. Chi’s hair is long.</i>
<i> B. Her eyes are brown. </i>


<i>C. They are full.</i>
<i>D. Her hair is black.</i>
<i>E. Her nose is small.</i>


III.POST- READING Time: 10 M
<b>5. Survey:</b>


- Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to
work in pairs to asks & answer something
about themselves & take note into the table.
- Asks Ss to give their information &
comments.


- Working in pairs to asks & answer
something about themselves & take note into
the table.



- Giving their information.


My partner My Mum My Dad My Brother My Sister


<i>Body</i> <i>Thin</i>
<i>Face</i> <i>Round</i>
<i>Hair</i> <i>Short - black</i>
<i>Eyes</i> <i><sub>Etc</sub><sub>…</sub></i>
<i>Nose</i>


<b>IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M)</b>


- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


<b>V.Homework ( Time: 2 M ):</b>


- Study the vocabulary & the content of the texts.


- Exercise: write a short paragraph to describe people using the survey.
- Prepare the pictures on page 104 & 106.


<b>VI.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 6/1/2010



Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 10: staying healthy </b>
<b>Lesson 1: how do you feel? (a1,2,5)</b>


<b>Period: 60</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(124)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=124>

- Helps Ss to practice in talking about how we feel using adjectives of Physical state.
By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about how we feel.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


- The present simple tense.
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision ( 5 M ) : Picture cues.</b>


- Asks Ss to work in pairs, take it in turn to point at the different picture on page
104-105 & ask and answer. Using the exchange: S1: What’s this color ?


S2: It’s green.
- Corrects & comments.



<b> </b>
<b> III. New lesson :</b>


TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS


I.PRESENTATION Time: 10 M.
1.Vocabulary:


<i> </i>hungry (adj); thirsty (adj);
full (adj); tired (adj);
hot (adj); cold (adj);


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Matching:


- Presents the words & the meaning into two
column then asks Ss to work in individual to
match the word to its meaning.



- Corrects & comments.


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Copying the words.


- Working in individual to match.
hungry (adj);


thirsty (adj);
full (adj);
tired (adj);


<i> hot (adj); </i>
cold (adj);


l ạnh
nóng
<i>đói</i>
<i>khát</i>


<i>mệt</i>
<i>no</i>


II.PRACTICE Time: 20 M.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(125)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=125>

- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.


- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
4. Picture drill: A1-P104 + A5-P106


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.


- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs .


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
5. Matching:


- Introduces the requirements & asks Ss to
listen to the tape & match the right name


with the pictures on page 106.


- Asks Ss to compare & give their matching.
- Helps SS to correct & comments.


* Example exchange:


<i>S1: How do you feel ?</i>
<i>S2: I’m [ hungry].</i>


<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.


HUNGRY THIRSTY HOT


COLD TIRED FULL


* Example exchange:


<i>S1: How does he/she feel ?</i>
<i>S2: He/she is [ hungry].</i>
<i>S1: How do they feel ?</i>
<i>S2: They are [ hungry].</i>
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Correcting the pronunciation.



- Listening to the tape & matching the right
name with the pictures on page 106.


- Comparing & giving their matching.
III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time 5 M


4. Guessing game:


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
write their physical state on a piece of paper
then ask the other to guess.


- Helps Ss to play the game.
-Corrects & comments.


- Writing their physical state on a piece of
paper then ask the other to guess.


- Playing the game.
* Example exchange:


<i>S1: Are you thirsty ?</i>
<i>S2: No, I’m not.</i>
<i> S1: Are you hot ?…</i>
IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):


- Asks Ss to give the way to ask & answer about their physical state.
<i>S1: How do you feel ?</i>


<i>S2: I’m [ hungry].</i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(126)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=126>

<i>S2: He/she is [ hungry].</i>
<i>S1: How do they feel ?</i>
<i> S2: They are [ hungry].</i>
V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):


- Study the model sentences & the vocabulary.
- Exercise: 1-P87. Workbook.


- Prepare the picture on page 105 & what you like to eat or drink.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
...


<b>WEEK: 21</b>


Preparing's day: 8/1/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 10: staying healthy </b>
<b>Lesson 2: how do you feel? (a3-4)</b>


<b>Period: 61</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


- Helps Ss to read a dialogue to recognize polite offers & requests with “What


would you like ?” & “I’d like some/ a/ to…”. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to
recognize the polite offers & requests.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


- The present simple tense.
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence
<b>II- Revision </b>


<b> III. New lesson :</b>


TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS


I.PRE-READING Time: 15 M.
1. Vocabulary:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(127)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=127>

<i> (To) Want = Would Like; </i>


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).


Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Predict Dialogue:


- Introduces the open dialogue & asks Ss to
work in pairs to predict the suitable words to
fill in the gaps to complete the dialogue.
- Asks Ss to give their prediction.


- Comments their prediction.


- Repeating The Words In Chorus & In
Individual.


- Correcting The Mistakes.


- Giving The Meaning & The Pronunciation.
- Copying The Words.


- Working In Pairs To Predict The Suitable
Words To Fill In The Gaps To Complete The
Dialogue.



- Giving Their Prediction.
* Open Dialogue:


<i>Nam: How Do You Feel ?</i>
<i>Lan: I’m ………And………</i>
<i>Nam: What would you like ?</i>


<i>Lan: I’d like some……… What about you ?</i>
<i>Nam: I’m…… I’d like some………</i>


II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M


3. Presentation dialogue. A3-P105.


- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the dialogue
between Nam & Lan & get the details.


- Asks Ss to check their prediction.
- Corrects comments.


4. Matching:


- Introduces the poster & asks Ss to read the
dialogue again & match the key words to the
people.


- Asks Ss to compare & give the keys.
- Helps Ss to correct & comments.


- Reading the dialogue.


- Checking their prediction.


- Working in pairs to read the dialogue again
& matching the key words to the people.
- Comparing & giving the keys.


- Correcting the answer keys &Commenting
<i>Hot</i>


<i>Tired</i>
<i>Thirsty</i>
<i>Full</i>
<i>Hungry</i>
<i>Noodles</i>
<i>A drink</i>


<i>Lan</i>
<i>hot</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(128)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=128>

<i>To sit down</i>


III.POST- READING Time: 10 M
5. Mapped dialogue:


- Introduces the dialogue & helps Ss to read
to remember.


- Asks Ss to practice the dialogue in groups
& in pairs.



- Asks Ss to complete the dialogue.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


- Reading the dialogue to remember.


- Practicing the dialogue in groups & in pairs.
- Completing the dialogue.


<i>…fell ?</i>
<i>…like ?</i>
<i>…thirsty</i>
<i>… orange juice.</i>


<i>…cold + hungry</i>
<i>…some noodles…fell ?</i>


<i>…like ?</i>


* Example exchange:
<i>S1: How do you fell ?</i>
<i>S2: I’m cold and hungry.</i>
<i>S1: What would you like ?</i>


<i>S2: I’d like some noodles. How do you fell ?</i>
<i>S!: I’m thirsty.</i>


<i>S2: What would you like ?</i>
<i>S1: I’d like some orange juice.</i>



<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):</b>


- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson & give the form of the polite
offers & requests with “What would you like ?” & “I’d like some/ a/ to…”.


<b>V.Homework ( Time: 2 M ): </b>


- Study the vocabulary & the dialogue.
- Exercise: 2-P87- workbook.


- Prepare the pictures on page 110 & the menu.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
...


Preparing's day: 12/1/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 10: staying healthy </b>
<b>Lesson 3: food and drink (B1-3)</b>


<b>Period: 62</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


- Helps Ss to practice in Some / Any with There is / There are, positive, negative & Yes /
No questions to talk about food & drink . By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to use


these grammars to talk about food & drink correctly.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(129)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=129>

- The present simple tense.


<i><b> </b></i>Some / Any with There is / There are,
Positive, Negative & Yes / No questions
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence


<b>II- Revision Networks.</b>


- Introduces the requirement & asks
Ss to give the food & drink that
they usually have.


- Comments.


<i><b>food</b></i>


<i><b>rice meat</b></i>


<i><b>Drink</b></i>
<i><b>Milk a drink</b></i>



<b> </b>
<b> III. New lesson :</b>


TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS


I.PRESENTATION Time: 20 M.
1.Vocabulary: - ROR.


an apple (n); an orange (n);
a banana (n); some water (n).
- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Dictation list:


- Presents the words & the table then asks Ss
to listen & put the words into the correct
column.



- Asks Ss to compare & giving their list.
- Helps Ss to check & Corrects & comments.
* Teacher reads:


An apple; An orange Rice; Water Milk
Vegetables Meat; Noodle; Bread Banana
<i>Hot drink; Cold drink</i>


3. Presentation dialogue: B2-P109


- Listening to the words<i>. </i>


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Copying the words.


- Working in individual to list.


A AN SOME


<i>Banana</i>
<i>Hot drink</i>
<i>Cold drink</i>


<i>An apple</i>
An orange



<i>Rice</i>
<i>Water</i>


<i>Milk</i>
<i>Vegetables</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(130)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=130>

- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue & introduces the model sentence.
- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups
& in pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


4. Comprehension:


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
tick what for lunch on the list.


- Asks Ss to compare & give the key.
- Corrects & comments.


- Listening & Practicing the dialogue
-Correcting the pronunciation.


* Model sentences:


<i>(+) There is some rice</i>
<i>(?) Is there any rice ?</i>
<i>(-) There isn’t any rice.</i>


<i>(+) There are some rice</i>
<i>(?) Are there any rice ?</i>
<i>(-) There aren’t any rice.</i>
- Ticking what for lunch on the list.


- Comparing & giving the key.


Meat 


Rice 


noodles


Fruit 


Water 


Milk
II.PRACTICE Time 15 M


5. Picture drill: B1-P108


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.


- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing


in groups & in pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


Example exchange:


<i>S1: Is there any… ?</i>
<i>S2: Yes, there is some…</i>
<i> No, there isn’t any…</i>
<i>S1: Are there any… ?</i>
<i>S2: Yes, there are some…</i>
<i> No, there aren’t any…</i>
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Correcting the pronunciation.
IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):


- Asks Ss to give the way to use Some / Any with There is / There are, positive, negative &
Yes / No questions to talk about food & drink


V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):


- Study the model sentences & the vocabulary.
- Exercise: 1-2-3 P91 &92. Workbook.


- Prepare the picture on page 112 & what you like to eat or drink.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(131)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=131>

Preparing's day: 15/1/2010


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 10: staying healthy </b>
<b>Lesson 4: food and drink (B4-5)</b>


<b>Period: 63</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


- Helps Ss to practice in uncountable & plural Food & Drink nouns, polite requests
“I’d like some…” & polite offers “What would you like ?” . By the end of this lesson, Ss
will be able to use uncountable & plural Food & Drink nouns, polite requests “I’d like
some…” & polite offers “What would you like ?” correctly.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


- The present simple tense.<i>“What would you like ?”</i> - <i>“I’d like some…”</i>
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure</b>:


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence


<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> III. New lesson :</b>



TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS


I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Vocabulary: - ROR.


<i> </i>some chicken/ fish/ meat/ rice
fruit/ milk/ vegetable
(a vegetable).


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Matching / Grid:


- Presents the tape & the table then asks Ss
to listen & match the names of the people
with what they would like.


- Asks Ss to compare & giving their
matching.



- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Copying the words.


- Working in individual to match.


a b c d e f g h


Nhan x x


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(132)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=132>

- Helps Ss to check & Corrects & comments.
2. Presentation dialogue: B4-P110.


- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue & introduces the model sentence.
- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups
& in pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


Huong x x


Mai x x



- Listening & Practicing the dialogue
-Correcting the pronunciation.


* Model sentences:


- I’d like some chicken/ fish/ meat/ rice
fruit/ milk/ vegetable
II.PRACTICE Time: 15 M.


3. Picture drill: B4-P110 & B5-P111.


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.


- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


Example exchange:


<i>S1: What would you like ?</i>
<i>S2: I’d like some [ fish ]</i>
<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.


- Practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Correcting the pronunciation.
III.FURTHER PRACTICE Time 10 M


4. Chain game:


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
talk about what they would like in turn.
- Helps Ss to play the game.


-Corrects & comments.


- Talking about what they would like in turn.
- Playing the game.


* Example:


<i>S1: I’d like some fish.</i>


<i>S2: I’d like some fish & some vegetable.</i>
S3: I’d like some fish & some vegetables &
some orange juice.


S4:…
IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):


- Asks Ss to give the uncountable & plural Food & Drink nouns, polite requests “I’d like
some…” & polite offers “What would you like ?”.


V. Homework ( Time: 2M ):



- Study the model sentences & the vocabulary.
- Exercise: 1-2 P88. Workbook.


- Prepare the picture on page 108 & what you like to eat or drink.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(133)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=133>

...
...
<b>WEEK: 22</b>


Preparing's day: 20/1/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 10: staying healthy </b>


<b>Lesson 5: MY FAVORITE FOOD ( C 1-5).</b>
<b> Period: 64</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


- Helps Ss to practice in speaking about favorite food & drink to contrast “Would
you like…?” & “Do you like…?”. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about
their favorite food & drink.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


- The present simple tense.<i> “Would you like…?” & “Do you like…?”.</i>
II.Skill:



Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:


I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision


III. New lesson :


TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS


I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Vocabulary: - ROR.


my favorite food/ drink;
some carrots/ beans/
peas/ iced tea.


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.



- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Picture drill: B1-P108


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Copying the words.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(134)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=134>

- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
3. ROR dialogue: C2-P112.


- Introduces the dialogue by giving the
symbols for the words & Helps Ss to listen
to the dialogue.



- Helps Ss to read the dialogue in chorus to
remember.


- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups
& in pairs.


- Introduces the model sentence.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


<i> S2: They are beans. What are those?</i>
<i> S1: They are carrots.</i>


<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Correcting the pronunciation.


- Listening & Practicing the dialogue
-Correcting the pronunciation.


* Model sentences:


<i>S1: Do you like vegetables ?</i>
<i>S2: Yes, I do. / No, I don’t.</i>


<i>S1: Would you like some vegetables ?</i>
<i>S2: Yes, I would. / Yes, please.</i>


<i> No, I wouldn’t. / No, thank you</i>


II.PRACTICE Time 15 M


4. Word cue drill:


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.


- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


<i>beans</i> <i>peas</i> <i>carrots</i> <i>milk</i>


<i>iced tea</i> <i>oranges</i> <i>rice</i> <i>apple</i>


Example exchange:


<i> S1: Do you like [ beans ] ?</i>
<i> S2: Yes, I do. / [No, I don’t ].</i>


<i> S1: Would you like some [ beans ] now ?</i>
<i> S2: No, thank you./ Yes, please.</i>


<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.


- Practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Correcting the pronunciation.
III.PRODUCTION Time: 10 M.


5. Survey:


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in pairs to interview each other about
their favorite food & drink using the given
question & take note the information into the
table.


- Asks Ss to report the information about
their friends using the model.


- Working in pairs to interview each other &
taking note the information into the table.
- Reporting the information about their
friends.


<i>* </i>Question:<i> Do you like chicken ?</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(135)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=135>

- Corrects & comments. <i>he doesn’t like fish…</i>


<i>Name</i> Likes… <i>Doesn’t like…</i>


<i>Nam</i> <i>Chicken & orange</i> <i>Fish</i>


IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):



- Asks Ss to contrast “Would you like…?” & “Do you like…?”
V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):


- Study the model sentences & the vocabulary.
- Exercise: 4-5 92. Workbook.


- Prepare the picture on page 114 & what you like to eat or drink.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 21/1/2010


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 11: what do you eat? </b>
<b>Lesson 1: at the store (A1)</b>


<b> Period: 65</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


- Helps Ss to practice in quantifiers ( a kilo of…) & containers ( a bottle of…) to
talk about people buy at the store. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about
quantifiers & containers.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:



- The present simple tense. Quantifiers & Containers.
<b>II.Skill:</b> Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence


<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> III. New lesson :</b>


<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>


I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Vocabulary: - ROR.


some eggs/ chocolates;
some oil/ beef/ soap/
toothpaste.


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects


- Listening to the words.



- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(136)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=136>

the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Matching.


- Introduces the phrases & the pictures then
asks Ss to work in individual to match the
picture to the correct word .


- Asks Ss to compare their matching &
match.


- Corrects & comments.


-Copying the words.


- Working in individual to match the picture
to the correct word .


<i>grams of</i>
<i>a kilo of</i>


<i>a can of</i>
<i>a bar of</i>
<i>a box of</i>
<i>a tube of</i>
<i>a packet of</i>


<i>a dozen</i>
<i>a bottle of</i>


II.PRACTICE Time 25 M
3. ROR dialogue: A1a-P114.


- Introduces the dialogue by giving the
symbols for the words & Helps Ss tolisten to
the dialogue.


- Helps Ss to read the dialogue in chorus to
remember.


- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups
& in pairs.


- Introduces the model sentence.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
4. Picture drill: A1b-P115.


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.



- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing in
groups & in pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
5. Substitution drill:


- Introduces the requirement & helps Ss to
read the model then reads the substituted
words & asks Ss to read the substitution
sentence.


- Asks Ss to practice in individual.


- Corrects the pronunciation & comments.
* Teacher reads<i>:</i>


<i> water; oil; soap; peas; beans; coke;</i>
<i>chocolates; eggs; tea; noodles</i>


- Listening & Practicing the dialogue
-Correcting the pronunciation.


* Model sentences:


<i>S1: Can I help you ?</i>



<i>S2: Yes. A bottle of cooking oil, please.</i>
<i>S1: Here you are.</i>


<i>S2: Thank you.</i>


* Example exchange:


<i>S1: Can I help you ?</i>


<i>S2: Yes. A bottle of cooking oil, please.</i>
<i>S1: Here you are.</i>


<i> S2: Thank you.</i>


<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Correcting the pronunciation.


- Reading the model & the substituted words
- Reading the substitution sentence.


- Practicing in individual.


- Correcting the pronunciation & the
substitution.


* Ss repeat:


I’d like a bottle of water, please.


I’d like a bar of soap, please<i>.</i>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(137)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=137>

- Asks Ss to summarize the lesson.


<b>V.Homework ( Time: 2M ):</b>


- Study the model sentences & the vocabulary.
- Exercise: 1-2 P.93. Workbook.


- Prepare the picture on page 116 & Things on page 117.
<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 1/2/2010


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 11: what do you eat? </b>
<b>Lesson 2: at the store (A2)</b>


<b> Period: 66</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


- Helps Ss to listen to a dialogue for specific information about quantities for food
shopping. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail about
quantities for food shopping.



<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


-‘Can I help you ?’; (to) want…; (to) need….;


How much…? (uncountable noun; How many…? (countable noun)..
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence


<b>II- Revision </b>


<i><b>Dictation lists</b></i>: with "How much...?" " How many...?"


T reads: oranges, meat, milk, bread, carrots, chocolates, beef, chicken, rice, eggs, apples,
soap.


<i><b>Answer key:</b></i>


How much....?: meat, milk, bread, beef, chicken, rice, soap.


How many....? :oranges, carrots, chocolates, eggs, apples<b> </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :



<b>Teacher's works</b> <b>Students'works</b>


<b>I.Presentation.(10ms)</b>
1<b>.Presentation dialogue</b>.
A2 P.116


From the dialogue, T sets a sence to give the
model sentences.


1)I need/ want some <i><b>beef.</b></i>


How <i><b>much</b></i> do you need/ want?
2)I need/ want some <i><b>eggs.</b></i>


How <i><b>many</b></i> do you need/ want?


-Ss read the dialogue and answer the
questions of the teacher.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(138)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=138>

<b>II.Practice.(20ms)</b>
"Blackboard drill"


T shows the way to ask ss practice well.


Example exchanges:
S1:I need some beef.


S2:How much do you want?
S1:Three hundred grams, please.
...etc.



-T controls and corrects.
<b>III.Production (10ms)</b>
"Role play"


T asks each ss writes a shopping list. In pair, ss
take it in turns to be the storekeeper and the
customer.


Storekeeper Customer


Can I help you? I want/ need....
How much/


many...? I'd like....
Anything else? Do you have


any...
That's....dong,


please. ...please...Thank you !
-T corrects.


-Ss read the key words and practice
well.


-Ss practice in pair.


-Take notes.



-Ss work in role to practice well.


-Take notes.


<b>IV. Consolidation.(2m)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.


<b>V.Homework</b>.(2m)


-Doing exercise : A3 in the notebook.
-Preparing: Unit 11: B1, 3-4


<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
...
<b>WEEK 23</b>


Preparing's day: 1/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 11: what do you eat? </b>
<b>Lesson 3: at the store (A3-4)</b>


<b> Period: 67</b>


<i><b>Shopping list</b></i>



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(139)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=139>

<b>A.Objectives</b>:


- Helps Ss to listen to a dialogue for specific information about quantities for food
shopping. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to understand the detail about
quantities for food shopping.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


-‘Can I help you ?’; (to) want…; (to) need….;


How much…? (uncountable noun; How many…? (countable noun)..
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence


<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :


TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS


I.PRE-LISTENING Time: 5 M.


1.True / False statement prediction: (Grid)


- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work
in pairs to predict which the statements is
true or false.


- Asks Ss to compare the keys give the keys
& Comments


- Working in pairs to predict which the
statements is true or false.


- Comparing & Giving the keys.


Yes No


…big ? √


…small ? √


…a yard ? √


…a well ? √


…flowers ? √


… trees ? √


II.WHILE-LISTENING Time: 10 M:
2. Presentation dialogue: A1-P72.


- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the


dialogue & get the details.


- Helps Ss to listen to the dialogue & check
the prediction & Corrects.


- Listening to the dialogue & getting the
details.


- Listening to the dialogue & checking the
prediction.


III.PRE-READING Time: 10 M.
3. Vocabulary: Slap the Board.


a garden (n);
a vegetable (n);
a photo (n).


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(140)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=140>

meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.


4.True / False statement prediction:


- Introduces the statement & ask Ss to work
in pairs to predict which the statements is
true or false.


- Asks Ss to compare & give the keys &
Comments..


* Answer keys:


1. T; 2. F; 3. F; 4. T;


individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.


- Working in pairs to predict which the
statements is true or false.


- Comparing & Giving the keys.
* Statements:


1. The house is in the country.
2. There is a river near the house.


3. There’re trees to the left of the house.


4. There’re two gardens.


IV.WHILE-READING Time: 10 M
5. Presentation text: A2-P73.


- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the letter &
get the details.


- Asks Ss to give the main idea of the letter.
- Corrects comments.


6. Comprehension questions: A2/P73.


- Introduces the questions & asks Ss to work
in pairs to match the questions to the
answers.


- Helps Ss to correct & comments.


a. Is there a flowers garden in front of the
house ?


b. Is the house beautiful ?


c. Is there a flowers garden behind the
house?


d. Is there a lake to the right of the house?
e. Is Nga in the city ?



- Reading the letter & get the details.
- Giving the main idea of the letter.


- Working in pairs to match the questions to
the answers.


- Giving the answer keys.


- Correcting the answer keys &Commenting
A. Yes, it is.


B. No, it isn’t.
C. No, she isn’t.
D. Yes, there is..
E. No, there isn’t.


 Answer:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(141)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=141>

V.POST-LISTENING & READING
Time:5 M


7. Transformation writing:


- Introduces the requirement & ask Ss to
work in individual to change the underlined
information to describe their own house &
then draw a picture of it as a photo .


- Asks Ss to give their information &
comments.



- Writing in individual & giving the
information.


* My house:


There’s a flowers garden in front of the
house. There’s a vegetable garden behind the
house. To the left of the house, there’s a lake.
To the right of the house, there are tall trees.
Here is a photo.


IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M ):


- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.
V.Homeworks ( Time: 2 M ):


- Study the vocabulary & the content of the letter.
- Prepare the picture on page 74.


<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 3/2/2010


Teaching's day: 6G:



<b>Unit 11: what do you eat? </b>
<b>Lesson 4: at the canteen (b1,3,4)</b>


<b> Period: 68</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


- Helps students will be able to practice in Offers and Requests for Food and
Drink.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


- The present simple tense.<i> “Would you like…?” & “Do you like…?”.</i>
II.Skill:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.
B.Teaching procedure:


I.Settlement: -Greeting(1m)
-Check attendence
II- Revision


III. New lesson :


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>
<b>I.Practice.</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(142)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=142>

B1 P.119.


T asks Ss play it in team to taking it in turns


to fill up the lists on the board.


- Asks Ss to give their information &
comments.


There's a.. There's


some.... There are some....
-can of soda -rice - vegetables
.... -milk -apples


...etc ...etc. ...etc.
-T corrects.


<b>2.Matching</b>.(10M)


B4 P.120. T shows the way to ask ss to play.
- Asks Ss to give their information &


comments.


a b c d e f g h i j k l
2 4 1 5 7 3 6 8
-T corrects.


3<b>.Word cue drill.(10m)</b>


T shows the way to ask ss to practice well.
- Asks Ss to give their information &



comments.


bread/ milk fish/ soda
noodles/


water chicken/ iced tea
rice/ orange


juice


beef/


vegetables/
lemonade
Example exchanges: B2 P.120


S1:What would you like for breakfast?
S2:I'd like some bread and some milk.
...etc.


T controls and corrects.


<b>II.Production.(10m)</b>


- Asks Ss to give their information &
comments.


1.Chain game


S1: I'd like some fish.



S2: I'd like some fish and some rice.


-Ss enjoy the game.
-Ss play it in team to
taking it in turns to fill
up the lists on the
board.


- Working in pairs to
match the questions to
the answers.


- Giving the answer
keys.


- Correcting the answer
keys &Commenting


- Working in pairs to
match the questions to
the answers.


- Giving the answer
keys.


- Correcting the answer
keys &Commenting


- Working in pairs to


match the questions to
the answers.


- Giving the answer
keys.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(143)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=143>

S3: I'd like some fish and some rice and a
coke.


S4:...etc.


-Ss read the word cues
and practice well.


-Ss work in groups.


- Working in groups to
match the questions to
the answers.


- Giving the answer
keys.


- Correcting the answer
keys &Commenting


<b>IV. Consolidation.(2m)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.



<b>V.Homework (2m)</b>.


-Doing exercise : B1-2 in the workbook.
-Preparing: Unit 11: B5,6


<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
...
Preparing's day: 4/2/2010


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 10: what do you eat? </b>
<b>Lesson 5: at the canteen (b4-5)</b>


<b> Period: 69</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


- Helps students will be able to talking about price for Food and Drink with "
How much/ many...?"


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(144)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=144>

Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>



<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence


<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> III. New lesson :</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>
<b>I.Presentaetion.(10ms)</b>


<b>1.Pre-teach.</b>


T elicits to teach vocab.
-Fifty =50


-a hundred ( two hundred....) =100
( 200)


-a thousand ( two thousand....) =
1.000 ( 2.000)


-Seven thousand five hundred =
7.5000.


2.Checking vocab.
-Slap the board.


100 200 5.000



250 6.200


<b>II.Practice.(25m)</b>
<b>1.Blackboard drill.</b>


T shows the way to practice.
100 50 200


150 350 750


1.000 2.000 5.000 4.200
7.500 9.500 2.300 10.000


2.Noughts and crosses.


2.500
dong


500
dong


3.000
dong
4.800


dong 10.000 dong 1.000 dong
1.200


dong



8.500
dong


5.000
dong


-Guess the words- listen and
repeat.


- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting


-Ss enjoy the game.


-Listen- understand and
practice well.


- Working in pairs to match the
questions to the answers.


- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting


- Working in pairs to match the
questions to the answers.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(145)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=145>

<b>Example exchange:</b>



S1: How much is it?


S2: It's two thousand five hundred
dong.


<b>*Pre-teach</b>.P. 121
-a cake ( n) picture


-a sandwich : (n) picture
-a fried rice (n) axplaination
-an iced cream (n) explaination.
-a bowl of (n) picture.


- Introduces the words by explaining
the meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3
times ). Then helps SS to repeat ( 2
times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks
the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the
words.


*<b>Picture drill</b>. B5-6 P.121



Ex: S1: How much is a fried rice?
S2: It's two thousand five
hundred dong.


...etc.


<b>III.Production." survey"(5m)</b>


T asks ss to fill the survey according to Real price they
know, not the price in the texbook.


How
muc
h is
it ?


a
frie
d
rice


a
bo
wl
of


an
era
ser



a
rule
r


a
sch
ool
bag


Tieng Anh
6


... .... ... ... ... 11.200
dong


-T controls and corrects.


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus
& in individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the
pronunciation.


-Copying the words.


-Look at the picture and


practice well.


-Ss fill the survey according to
Real price they know, not the
price in the texbook.


<b>IV. Consolidation.(2m)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.


<b>V.Homework</b>.(2m)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(146)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=146>

...
...
...
...


<i><b>THE END</b></i>


<b>WEEK: 24</b>



Preparing's day: 5/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Grammar practice</b>
<b> Period: 70</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


- Helps students will be able to further practice in Likes and Dislikes ,


Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.


-Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence


<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>


<b>I.Likes and Dislikes.(20ms)</b>
1.Find someone who.


T shows the way to ask ss to practice.
- Gives the content of the exercise &
helps Ss to complete.



- Asks Ss to give the answer keys &
explains the reason how to choose the


-Listen and practice. - Working in


pairs to match the questions
to the answers.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(147)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=147>

keys.


- Corrects & comments.


Find someone who... Name


....likes fish Lan


....doesn't like chicken ...


....likes bread ....


....doesn't like rice ....


....likes milk ...


....doesn't like soda ...
...Doaesn't like vegetables. ...
2.Write it up.


Grammar practice 2 P.122 with "a" "an"
"some"



- Gives the content of the exercise &
helps Ss to complete.


- Asks Ss to give the answer keys &
explains the reason how to choose the
keys.


- Corrects & comments.
a: a sandwich, a banana...
an: an orange, an ice cream....
some: some noodles, some fish....
-T corrects.


3.Guessing game.


- Gives the content of the exercise &
helps Ss to complete.


- Asks Ss to give the answer keys &
explains the reason how to choose the
keys.


- Corrects & comments.
Example:


<i><b>I'd like some milk.</b></i>


S1: Would you like a sandwich?
S2: No, I wouldn't.



S1: Would you like some milk?
S2: yes, I would.


...etc.


<b>II Adjectives.(20ms)</b>


1.Grammar practice 3 P.123.
"Pelmanism"


- Gives the content of the exercise &
helps Ss to complete.


- Asks Ss to give the answer keys &
explains the reason how to choose the
keys.


&Commenting


Epected:


S1: Do you like fish?
S2: yes, I do.


S1: What your name?
S2: My name's Lan.
....etc.


-Ss work individually- share with


your partner.


- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting


-1 or 2 ss go to the boad then play the
game.


- Giving the answer keys.
- Correcting the answer keys
&Commenting


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(148)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=148>

- Corrects & comments.
T shows the way to practice.


tall long hot fat heavy weak


short short cold thin lihgt strong
2.Question words.


Grammar pracrice 4 P.123


- Gives the content of the exercise &
helps Ss to complete.


- Asks Ss to give the answer keys &
explains the reason how to choose the
keys.



- Corrects & comments.


3.Present simple $ present progressive.
Grammar practice 5 P.123.


- Gives the content of the exercise &
helps Ss to complete.


- Asks Ss to give the answer keys &
explains the reason how to choose the
keys.


- Corrects & comments.
4.Quantifiers.


"lucky number"


1.What does cooking oil come in?
2.What does tea come in?


3.L


4.What does soap come in?
5 What does soda come in?
6.L


7. What does iced tea come in?
8.What do noodles come in?
-T corrects.



-Ss play in groups ( 2 groups)


-Do the exercises.


-Ss enjoy the game.


-Take notes.


<b>IV. Consolidation.(2m)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main ideas in this lesson.
<b>V</b>


<b> .Homework</b>.(2m)


-Doing exercise : P.122-123 in the text book.
-Preparing: Unit 12:A1-2


<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
...


<i><b>THE END</b></i>


Preparing's day: 6/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(149)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=149>

<b> Period: 71</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


- Helps students will be able students will be able to consolidate the
knowledge from unit 9 to unit 11.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.


-Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence


<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :


Full name : …………...………


Class :6...



<b>I.</b> <b>Choose the best answers (4ms) </b>


1. Is her hair short ?


-No,it isn’t . It’s ……….


A,short B,long C,black D,yellow 1...
2. Is your mother thin or fat ?


- She is ………..


A, light B,thin C,tall D,heavy 2...
3. Thanh has ………


A,oval face B,an oval face C, a face oval D,round face 3...
4. What color are her eyes ?


-They’re ……….


A,long B,round C,black D,small 4...
5. I have………..hair.


A,long black B,a long black C,black longD,a black long 5...
6. ………….does he feel ?


A,How B,What C, How much D, How many 6...
7. ………you like noodles?


A,What B,Are C,Would D,Which 7...
8. I’m ………..I’d like some fish and rice



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(150)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=150>

A,in B,on C,at D,for 9...
10.There aren’t ……….apples on the table


A,any B,some C,a D,an 10...
11.Can I ……… you?


A,have B,help C,has D,do


11...


12.How ………..milk do you want?


A,many B,much C,some D,any 12...
13.I’d like ……….bananas,please.


A,any B,some C,an D,a 13...
14.How many oranges do you want?


A,Half a kilo B,A half kilo C,Dozen D,A kilos 14...


15.Can I help you ?


-………..of cooking oil,please.


A, A tube B, A kilo C, A bar D, A bottle 15...
16. A fried rice ……….2,500d


A, is B,are C, do D ,does 16...



<b>II. Put </b><i><b>a/an/some/any</b></i><b> (1m)</b>


1. There is ……….. bar of soap. 1: ...
2. I’d like ………….apple. 2: ...
3. Is there ……….. milk ? 3: ...
4. There are ………..bananas 4:...


<b>III. Put the words in the right groups (2ms)</b>


green head toe chicken Face
black finger egg red


1. Color :………
2. Body : <i>toe,</i> ………..
3. Food :………..


<b>IV. Give the correct tense of the verbs in the bracket (1,5 ms)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(151)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=151>

4. My father...(walk-not) to school everyday, he ...(go)
to school by motorbike.


5. They...(wait) for a bus at the moment.


<b>V . Make complete sentences (1,5ms)</b>


1.What/ she/ would like/ dinner ?


1………




2. How / beef/ he / want ?


2………...
3. How/ oranges/ she / want?


3...


<i><b>THE END</b></i>


Preparing's day: 7/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Tr¶ bµi kiĨm tra 1 tiÕt</b>
<b>Period: 72</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


- Helps students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from the text.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.


-Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.



<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence


<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :


<b>Teacher's activities</b> <b>Students'activities</b>


<b>I.Choose the best answers (4ms) /Time: 10m</b>
<b>1.</b>Is her hair short ?


-No,it isn’t . It’s ……….


A,short B,long C,black


- Gives the content of the
exercise & helps Ss to
complete.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(152)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=152>

D,yellow


2. Is your mother thin or fat ?
- She is ………..


A, light B,thin C,tall



D,heavy


3. Thanh has ………


A,oval face B,an oval face C, a face oval
D,round face 3...


4. What color are her eyes ?
-They’re ……….


A,long B,round C,black


D,small
5. I have………..hair.


A,long black B,a long black C,black longD,a
black long


6. ………….does he feel ?


A,How B,What C, How much D,


How many


7. ………you like noodles?


A,What B,Are C,Would


D,Which



8. I’m ………..I’d like some fish and rice


A, cold B, hot C, hungry


D, thirsty


9. What would you like …………dinner?


A,in B,on C,at


D,for


10.There aren’t ……….apples on the table


A,any B,some C,a


D,an


11.Can I ……… you?


A,have B,help C,has


D,do


12.How ………..milk do you want?


A,many B,much C,some


D,any 12...
13.I’d like ……….bananas,please.



A,any B,some C,an


D,a


14.How many oranges do you want?


keys & explains the reason
how to choose the keys.
- Corrects & comments.
Key:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(153)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=153>

A,Half a kilo B,A half kilo C,Dozen


D,A kilos
15.Can I help you ?


-………..of cooking oil,please.


A, A tube B, A kilo C, A bar D, A bottle
16. A fried rice ……….2,500d


A, is B,are C, do D ,does
16...


<b>II. Put </b><i><b>a/an/some/any</b></i><b> (1m) /Time: 5m</b>


1.There is ……….. bar of soap. 1: ...
2.I’d like ………….apple. 2: ...
3.Is there ……….. milk ? 3: ...


4.There are ………..bananas 4:...


<b>III. Put the words in the right groups (2ms)/ Time: 5m</b>


green head toe chicken Face
black finger egg red


1.Color :………
2.Body : <i>toe,</i> ………..
3.Food :………..


<b>IV. Give the correct tense of the verbs in the bracket </b>
<b>(1,5 ms) /Time: 10m</b>


1. He ………..( ride ) his bike everyday.
2. Lan ……….( watch ) television now
3. You can ………..(park ) here


4. My father...(walk-not) to school
everyday, he ...(go) to school by motorbike.
5. They...(wait) for a bus at the moment.


- Gives the content of the
exercise & helps Ss to
complete.


- Asks Ss to give the answer
keys & explains the reason
how to choose the keys.


- Corrects & comments.
KEY:


1.A 2.AN 3.ANY
4.SOME


- Gives the content of the
exercise & helps Ss to
complete.


- Asks Ss to give the answer
keys & explains the reason
how to choose the keys.
- Corrects & comments.
Key:


1.Color: green, black,red
2.Body: toe,head,face,finger
3.food:chicken,


- Gives the content of the
exercise & helps Ss to
complete.


- Asks Ss to give the answer
keys & explains the reason
how to choose the keys.
- Corrects & comments.
Key:



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(154)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=154>

<b>V . Make complete sentences (1,5ms) /Time: 10m</b>


1.What/ she/ would like/ dinner ?


2. How / beef/ he / want ?


3. How/ oranges/ she / want?


5.are waiting
Key:


1.What would she like for
dinner?


2.How much beef does he
want?


3.How many oranges does
she want?


<b>IV. Consolidation.(2m)</b>


-T calls some Ss to give the main grammar in this lesson.
<b>V</b>


<b> .Homework</b>.(2m)



-Doing exercise : P.122-123 in the text book.
-Preparing: Unit 12:A1-2


<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
...


<i><b>THE END</b></i>


<b>WEEK: 25</b>


Preparing's day: 7/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 12: sports and pastimes</b>
<b>Lesson 1: What are you doing? (a1-2)</b>


<b>Period: 73</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


Helps Ss to practice in Present Progressive & sport vocabulary. By the end of this
lesson, Ss will be able to talk about what people are doing now.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


-Present progressive.


<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(155)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=155>

<b>II- Revision </b>


<b> </b>Jumbled words.


- Gives the jumbled words & asks Ss to put the letters into the right order to form the
correct words.


Torps = sport; bolfatol = football; belvalylol = volleyball;
Mage = game; sucim = music; lietoseniv = television
- Corrects S’s answers & comments.


<b> III. New lesson :</b>


TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS


I.PRESENTATION Time: 15 M.
1.Vocabulary: - ROR.


<i>(to) swim; (to) play badminton; </i>
<i>(to) jog; (to) do aerobics;</i>
(to) skip; (to) play table tennis;.



- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the situation.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps SS to repeat ( 2 times ).


- Checks S’s reading in individual & corrects
the mistakes.


- Writes the words on the Bb & checks the
meaning & the pronunciation.


- Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Dictation list:


- Presents the words & the table then asks Ss
to listen & put the words into the correct
column.


- Asks Ss to compare & giving their list.
- Helps Ss to check & Corrects & comments.
* Teacher reads:


play football; jog; do aerobics; play tennis;
play table tennis; play volleyball.


3. Presentation dialogue: A1-P124.


- Introduces & Helps Ss to listen to the
dialogue & introduces the example


exchange.


- Helps Ss to practice the dialogue in groups
& in pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


<i>- </i>Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in
individual.


- Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Copying the words.


- Working in individual to list.


2 people 1 person


- Listening & Practicing the dialogue
-Correcting the pronunciation.


*Example exchange:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(156)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=156>

II.PRACTICE Time 10 M
4. Picture drill: A1-P124.


- Introduces the example exchange &


Helps Ss to practice.


- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.


<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Correcting the pronunciation.
*Example exchange:


<i>S1: What are they doing? </i>
<i>S2: They’re playing soccer.</i>
<i>S1: What is She / he doing ?</i>
<i> S2: She / he skipping.</i>


III.Further practice Time: 10 M
5. Noughts & Crosses:


-Gives the requirement & asks Ss to work in
groups to choose the picture & make the
question & the answer.


- Corrects & comments.



- Working in groups to choose the cue &
make the question & the answer.


*Example exchange:
<i>S1: Picture C.</i>


<i>S1: What are they doing? </i>
<i> S2: They’re playing soccer.</i>


Picture C <i>Picture A</i> <i>Picture B</i>


<i>Picture F</i> <i>Picture D</i> <i>Picture E</i>


<i>Picture H</i> <i>Picture G</i> <i>Picture I</i>


<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2M ):</b>


- Asks Ss to summarize the lesson.


<b>V.Homework(Time: 2M):</b>


- Study the model sentences & the vocabulary.
- Exercise: 1-2 P.103. Workbook.


- Prepare the pictures on page 125 .
<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...


...
Preparing's day: 17/2/2010


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 12: sports and pastimes</b>
<b>Lesson 2: What are you doing? (a3-5)</b>


<b>Period: 74</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(157)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=157>

- Helps Ss to read a short text about sport, & practicing “WHICH” questions with
simple present tense. By the end of this lesson, Ss will be able to talk about people regular
exercise.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>


<i><b> </b></i>“WHICH” questions with simple present tense.:


<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence


<b>II- Revision </b>



<b> </b>Slap the board.


- Introduces the words & helps Ss to practice in two groups.


Môn bóng bàn mơn cầu lơng đi bộ thể dục bóng đá


Mơn bóng chuyền nhảy dây bơi mơn quần vợt


- Comments the game.


<b> </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :


TEACHER'S WORKS STUDENTS' WORKS


I.PRE-READING Time: 5 M.
1. Open predict:


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in pairs to predict what sport Lan &
Nam like (3 each ).


- Asks Ss to give their prediction.
- Comments their prediction.


- Working in pairs to predict what sport Lan
& Nam like (3 each ).


- Giving Their Prediction.



Lan Nam


<i>1.</i>
<i>2.</i>
<i>3.</i>


<i>1.</i>
<i>2.</i>
<i>3.</i>
II.WHILE-READING Time: 15 M


2. Presentation text. A4-P126.


- Introduces & Helps Ss to read the text
about Nam & Lan & get the details.


- Asks Ss to check their prediction.
- Corrects comments.


- Reading the text.


- Checking their prediction.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(158)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=158>

3. Comprehension questions:


- Introduces the questions & Asks Ss to
work in pairs to answer the questions.


- Asks Ss to give the answers & corrects.



III.POST- READING Time: 15 M
4. Picture drill: A3-P125.


- Introduces the example exchange & Helps
Ss to practice.


- Reads the first model for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.


-Giving the answers & correcting.
* Questions:


<i>a. Which sport does Lan play ?</i>
<i>b. Does Lan play tennis ?</i>


<i>c. Which sport does Nam play ?</i>
<i>d. Does Nam play table tennis ?</i>
* Answers:


<i>a. Lan swim, does aerobics & play</i>
<i>badminton.</i>


<i>b. No, she doesn’t.</i>


<i>c. Nam plays soccer, table tennis, & jogs. </i>
<i>d, Yes, he does.</i>


<i>- </i>Repeating in chorus & in individual.


- Making sentences for the next cues.


- Practicing in groups with teacher & in
closed pairs .


- Correcting the pronunciation
- Practices with Ss in the whole class &


checks S’s practicing in groups & in pairs .
- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
5. Survey:


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in pairs to ask each other about the
sports they do & fill the information into the
table.


- Asks Ss to compare & report the
information.


- Comments S’s information.


* Example exchange:


<i> S1: Which sport do you do ?</i>
<i> S2: I [ play soccer ] & [ swim ].</i>
- Working in pairs to ask each other about the
sport they do & filling the information into
the table.



- Comparing& reporting the information.
* Example exchange:


<i> S1: Which sport do you do ?</i>
<i> S2: I swim.</i>


<i> S1: What else ?</i>
<i> S2: I play volleyball.</i>


<i> S1: Do you play table tennis ?</i>
<i> S2: Yes, I do.</i>


<i>Name</i> Sport


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(159)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=159>

<b>IV.CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2</b>


- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson


<b>V.Homework Time: 2m: </b>


- Study the vocabulary & exchange.
- Exercise: 3-4-P104- workbook.


- Prepare the pictures on page 127& what you do in your free times.


<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...


Preparing's day: 18/2/2010


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 12: sports and pastimes</b>
<b>Lesson 3: free time (b1-3)</b>


<b>Period: 75</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


- Helps Ss to write a short text about what they do in their free time. By the end of
this lesson, Ss will be able to write a short text about what they do in their free time.


<b>I.Knowledge</b>:
- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence


<b>II- Revision </b>


Guessing game.



I……..in my free time * Example:


S1: Do you play ….in your free time ?
S2: No, I don’t.


S1: Do you watch TV ?
S2: No, I don’t


- Introduces the words & helps Ss to
practice in two groups.


- Comments the game.


<b> III. New lesson :</b>


<b>TEACHER'S WORKS</b> <b>STUDENTS' WORKS</b>


I.PRE-WRITING Time: 20 M.
1.Vocabulary:


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(160)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=160>

(to) go fishing;
(to) go to the movie.


- Introduces the words by explaining the
meaning, using the pictures on P78/79.


- Reads the words for the modal (3 times ).
Then helps Ss to repeat ( 2 times ).



- Checks S’s reading in individual &
corrects the mistakes.


- Checks the meaning & the pronunciation.
-Corrects & asks Ss to copy the words.
2. Picture drill: B1-P127.


- Introduces the example exchange &
Helps Ss to practice.


- Reads the first modal for example & asks
Ss to repeat in chorus & in individual.


- Asks Ss to make sentences for the next.
- Practices with Ss & checks S’s practicing
in groups & in pairs.


- Corrects S’s pronunciation & comments.
3. Transformation writing - B1-P127.


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in pairs to change “ I “ to the name of
people in the pictures.


- Asks Ss to compare & give their writing.
- Corrects & comments.


- Listening to the words.


- Repeating the words in chorus & in


individual. Correcting the mistakes.


- Giving the meaning & the pronunciation.
- Copying the words.


- Repeating in chorus & in individual.
- Making sentences for the next cues.
- Practicing in groups & in pairs.
- Correcting the pronunciation.
*Example exchange:


S1: What does Phuong do in his free time?
S2: He goes to the movie.


- Working in pairs to change “ I “ to the name
of people in the pictures.


- Comparing & giving their writing.
* Answer :


a. Phuong goes to the movie.
b. Ly watches TV


c. Nam reads


d. Lan listens to music.
e. Tuan goes fishing.
f. Long play video games.
II.WHILE-WRITING



Time: 15 M
4. Pyramid:


- Introduces the requirement & asks Ss to
work in individual to write 3 things about
what they do in their free time & put all their
sentences together on a poster.


- Asks Ss to report their information.
- Comments.


* Example:


- Working in individual to write 3 things
about what they do in their free time &
putting all the sentences together on a poster.
- Reporting the information.


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(161)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=161>

+ Individual writing:


( San writes ) I watch TV, I go fishing & I
play football.


( Thuy writes ) I watch TV, I go to the park
& I play badminton.


( Chinh writes ) I listen to music, I play
football & I watch TV.


San, Thuy & Chinh watch Tv


San & Chinh play football
San goes fishing


Thuy goes to the part & ply badminton
Chinh listens to music


<b>IV. CONSOLIDATION ( Time: 2 M )</b>


<b> </b>- Asks Ss to summarize the general idea of the lesson.


<b>V.Homework ( Time: 2 M ):</b>


- Study the vocabulary & exchange.
- Exercise: 1-2-P104-105 workbook.
- Prepare the pictures on page 128 & 129.


<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...


Preparing's day: 7/2/2010
Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 12: sports and pastimes</b>
<b>Lesson 1: What are you doing? (a1-2)</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(162)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=162>

<b>A.Objectives</b>:



- Helps students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from the text.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.


-Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence


<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :


<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...
Preparing's day: 7/2/2010


Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 12: sports and pastimes</b>


<b>Lesson 1: What are you doing? (a1-2)</b>


<b>Period: 72</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


- Helps students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from the text.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.


-Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence


<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :


<b>C.Can improved:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(163)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=163>

...
Preparing's day: 7/2/2010



Teaching's day: 6G:


<b>Unit 12: sports and pastimes</b>
<b>Lesson 1: What are you doing? (a1-2)</b>


<b>Period: 72</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


- Helps students will be able to consolidate the knowledge from the text.
<b>I.Knowledge</b>:


- Simple present tense
-Present progressive.


-Likes and Dislikes , Countability, Adjectives, Questions, Quanlitifies
<b>II.Skill</b>:


Speaking, writing, reading and listening.


<b>B.Teaching procedure:</b>


<b>I.Settlement</b>: -Greeting(1m)


-Check attendence


<b>II- Revision </b>
<b> III. New lesson</b> :



<b>C.Can improved:</b>


...
...
...


<b>Date: 9/3/2007</b>
<b> Period 80</b>


Unit13 <b>activities and the seasons</b>


Lesson 2: A2-3 (*P. 135)


<b>A Objective</b>:


By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to talk about your favourite weather and contrast it
with ‘’What is the weather like?’’


<b>I</b>.<b>Knowledges : </b>What weather do you like?
<b> </b>What is the weather like?
<b> II. Skill</b>: Speaking


<b> III. Preparation</b> : Book, board, lesson plan, .
<b>B. Procedures :</b>


<b> I. Settlement</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(164)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=164>

Check attandence
<b>II.Checking : </b>


Asks Ss to make question and the answer from cues :


Can tho / hot


. <b> III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>1. Revision : </b>


<b>Wordsquare </b>


_ Asks Ss to find out vocabfrom wordsquare
F


A
L
L
C
O
L
D
X
W
A
R
M


N
S
S
G
N


I
R
P
S
U
E
O
N
L
N
I
O
M
A


T
H
S
I


Ss work in individually to find
out vocabfrom wordsquare


Listen to the tape to correct
their precdictions




-Ss listen and then practice in
pairs



Ss copy down on their
notebook


Work in pairs to practice
following example exchange:
S1:What weather do you/ they
like?


<b>S</b>2 : I / Theylike [hot] weather


Work in pairs to make the dia
Example:


S1: What is the weather like in
Ha noi?


S2: It’s cold


S1: What is the weather like in
Can tho?


S2: It’s hot


S1: What weather do you like?
<b>S</b>2 : I like cold weather
S1: come to Ha noi


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(165)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=165>

T
S


M


S
C
O
O
L
K
E
E
O
W


E
A
T
H
E
R
N


<i><b>Answer keys </b></i>


<b>: </b>Spring


<b>: </b>go, got, me, sea,on,summer,season


<b>: </b>fall,cold,warm,cool,weather
<b>2 Presentation:A3 P 135</b>



-T reads the text ,then asks Ss to practice
<b>Model sentences :</b>


What weather do you like?
<b> </b>I like hot weather


What is the weather like today ?
<b> </b>It’s cold


<b>3. Practice : Picture drill/ Word cue drill</b>
<b> A3 P135</b>


-Asks Ss to practice in pairs following example
exchange:


S1 : What weather do you/ they like?
<b> S</b>2 : I /Theylike [hot] weather


a.She /like/ hotweather
b. I /like /cool


c. Huy/like/ warm
<b>4. Further practice :</b>
<b>Mapped dialogue:</b>
<b>-</b>Asks Ss to make the dia


Can tho

Ha noi
....Hanoi? ...cold


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(166)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=166>

. .. Can tho ?


...hot ...like?
...cold . ...hanoi?
...like? ...hot...
....can tho


<b>IV. Consolidation</b>:


 Asks Ss to write the model sentences.
<b>V. Homework:</b>


 Prepare Unit 13 Lesson 3


 Do ex 2,3 P 108 (work book)


<b>Date: 9/3/2007</b>
<b> </b>


<b> Period 81</b>


Unit13 <b>activities and the seasons</b>

Lesson 3: A4-5 (P. 136)


<b>A Objective</b>:


By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to use ‘’when ‘’ clauses in positive statements and
‘’Wh’’ questions


<b>I</b>.<b>Knowledges : </b>What questions
<b> II. Skill</b>: Speaking


<b> III. Preparation</b> : Book, board, lesson plan, .


<b>B. Procedures :</b>


<b> I. Settlement</b>


Greeting


Check attandence
<b>II.Checking : </b>


Asks Ss to make question and the answer from cues :
She/like/ hot


<b>. </b> III. New lesson:


<b>Teacher</b>’<b>s activities</b> <b>Students</b>’<b> activities</b>
<b>1 Presentation:</b>


<b>Networks </b>go for a walk listen to music
read a book watch TV fly kites


<b> </b>


play soccer<b> Pastimes </b>go swimming
<b>Predict </b>


<b>-</b>Asks Ss to predict what Ba does when it’s hot/ cold/
cool/warm


<b>Answer keys :</b>



a. when it’s hot He goes camping.
<b>b.</b> when it’s cold he plays soccer
<b>c.</b> when it’s cool he goes jogging


Ss work in individually to write
vocab


- go joging , go fishing , play
badmimton


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(167)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=167>

<b>d.</b> when it’s warm he goes fishing
<b>Presentation Text : A4 P136</b>


-T reads the text ,then asks Ss to read and check their
predictions .


<b>Model sentences :</b>


what does Ba do when it’s hot?
Do you


He goes swimming .
I go


<b>3. Practice : Word cue drill</b>


-Asks Ss to practice in pairs following example
exchange:


S1 : When it’s cold do you jog?


<b> S</b>2 : Yes, I do / No,I don’t
a.cold / go jogging ?


b. cool/ do aerobics?
c. hot / go swimming?
d. warm / go to the park?
<b>4. Further practice :</b>


<b>Transformation writing:</b>


<b>-</b>Asks Ss to change the text about Ba to write about
themselves ,using ‘I’ following example :


when it’s hot I ...
when it’s cold .I....
when it’s cool.I...
when it’s warm I...


- Then Asks Ss to swap their writing on the board , read
their‘s partner’s text then write about their partner,using
He/She


Listen to the text, then read to
correct their precdictions




-Copy down the model
sentences



Work in pairs to practice
following example exchange:
S1 : When it’s cold do you
jog?


<b> S</b>2 : Yes, I do / No,I don’t


Work in pairs to change the
text about Ba to write about
themselves ,using ‘I’ following
example :


when it’s hot I ...
when it’s cold ...
when it’s cool...
when it’s warm ...


Then swap their writing on the
board , read their‘s partner’s
text then write about their
partner,using He/She
following example :


when it’s hot She ...
when it’s cold he...
when it’s cool. she...
when it’s warm he...
<b>IV. Consolidation</b>:


 Asks Ss to write the model sentences.


<b>V. Homework:</b>


 Prepare Unit 13 Lesson 4


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(168)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=168>

<b>Date : 12 /3/2007</b>


Period 82


Unit13 <b>activities and the seasons</b>


<b> </b>

<b>Lesson 4: B1 (*P. 138-9)</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


<b> By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further practice in advs of frequency, </b>
<b>Simple present , sports vocabulary,season</b>


<b>I, Knowledges</b>: sports, seasons vocabulary
advs of frequency


<b>II,Skills:</b> Speaking
<b>III,Preperation: </b>


Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book


<b>B.Procedures</b>:


<b>I,Settlement </b>Greeting
Check attandence



<b> II,Checking</b>. Check the form


What do you do whene it's hot?
<b> </b>III,New lesson:


Teacher's activities

<b>Students' activities</b>
-<b>1 Matching </b>:


-Asks SS to match


<b> </b>








<b>x</b>
never
always
often
usually
sometimes
<b>2 Presentation:</b>
<b>*</b>Pre -teach:


(to) play basketball:
( to) go sailing:


T uses the techniques to elicit each word



T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus and then individually


T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy


<b>Check : What and Where</b>


Work in individually to
match


Listen and repeat in choral,
in groups, in individually
Then copy down on their
notebooks


Work in groups to play this
game


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(169)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=169>

play basketball go sailing


<b> cold hot warm weather</b>
Presentation : B1 P 138


<b>-</b>Reads the text , then asks Ss to practice the text
<b>2.Practice:Answer given:</b>


<b>Asks Ss to make questions for the answer</b>
<b>a. We often play volleyball?</b>



<b>b. They sometimes go sailing </b>
<b>c. I often go swimming </b>


<b>d. She usually plays badminton</b>
<b>e. We always play basketball</b>
Answer given:


<b> a.What do you do in the spring?</b>
<b> b. What do they do in the fall?</b>
<b> c. What do you do in the summer ?</b>
<b> d.What does do in the fall?</b>


<b> e.What do you do in the winter? </b>
3 Production :


Lucky Numbers


<b>-Asks Ss to play the game by answer the questions</b>
<b>1</b>


<b>2</b>
<b>3</b>
<b>4</b>
<b>10</b>
<b>11</b>
<b>12</b>
<b>5</b>
<b>9</b>
<b>8</b>


<b>7</b>
<b>6</b>


<b>1 What is the weather like in winter ?</b>
<b>2 What do you usually do in the winter?</b>
<b>3 What do you usually eat in the winter?</b>


Work in individually to
make the


<b>questions for the answers </b>
Then share with their parter
in pairs


Work in groups to answer
the questions


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(170)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=170>

<b>4 LN</b>


<b>5 What is the weather like in the spring ?</b>
<b>6 LN</b>


<b>7 Where do you usually go in the summer ?</b>
<b>8 What weather do you like ?</b>


<b>9 What fruit do you like ?</b>
<b>10 LN </b>


<b>11 What is the weather like in the fall ?</b>
<b>12 What sports do you do in the winter?</b>



<b>IV Consolidation:</b>
<b>V, Homework:</b>


10 Do ex 1,2 P 111-112
11 Prepare Lesson 5 B2


<b>Date 12 /3/2007</b>


Period 83


Unit13 <b>activities and the seasons</b>


<b> </b>

<b>Lesson 5: B2 (*P. 139)</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


<b> By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to talk write activities you do in different </b>
<b>season</b>


<b>I, Knowledges</b>: temperature and seasons vocabulary
What 's the weather like ?


<b>II,Skills:</b> Writing
<b>III,Preperation: </b>


Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book


<b>B.Procedures</b>:



<b>I,Settlement </b>Greeting
Check attandence


<b> II,Checking</b>. Check vocab
<b> </b>III,New lesson:


Teacher's activities

<b>Students' activities</b>
-<b>1 Pre-Writing:</b>


*Brainstorm: <b>watch TV</b>


Activities


summer and seasons winter


play in the park go swimming go jogging
hot winter


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(171)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=171>

Board drill : B2 P. 139


<b>-A</b>sks Ss to practice the structure
<b>S1 : </b>What do you do in the summer ?
S2 : I often play tennis


<b>Survey :</b>


Asks SS to fill in the table by asking and answering follwing
example:



Name
Season
Weather
usuallygo
usuallydo
usually
Hoai
fall
cool
The


mountains
Go camping
A picnic hot drink


S1; Which season do you like ?
S2;: Fall


S1: What's the weather do you like in the fall
S2: It's cool


S1: Where do you usually do you go ?
S2: to the mountains


S1: What do you usually do there ?
S2: I go camping with my friends
S1: What do you usually eat or drink ?


S2 We usually take a picnic and a lot of hot drinks
Write it up:



- Asks SS to write about the friends following example


Hoai likes the fall whene the weather is cool.She usually goes
camping


Work in pairs to
practice the structure
<b>S1 : </b>What do you do in
the summer ?


S2 : I often [ play
tennis ]


Work in pairs to ask
and answer follwing
example


Practice the dialogue


<b>...</b>


Work in groups to write
about the friends


following example
Hoai likes the fall
whene the weather is
cool.She usually goes
camping



</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(172)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=172>

<b>V, Homework:</b>
12 Do ex 4


- Prepare Unit 14 Lesson 1 A1-3 (P 140-141)


<b>Date : 20 /3/2007</b>


Period 84


Unit14 <b>making plans</b>


<b> </b>

<b>Lesson 1: A1 (*P. 140-141)</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


<b> By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to talk vacation plans </b>


<b>I, Knowledges</b>: ''going to , positive statements and Wh 'questions
<b>II,Skills:</b> Speaking


<b>III,Preperation: </b>


Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book


<b>B.Procedures</b>:


<b>I,Settlement </b>Greeting
Check attandence



<b> II,Checking</b>. Check the form


What do you do when it's hot?
<b> </b>III,New lesson:


Teacher's activities

<b>Students' activities</b>
-1<b> Presentation:</b>


<b>*</b>Pre -teach:


the summer vacation ( translation) : kú nghØ hÌ
the citadel (picture): thµnh néi


(to) stay with ( someone): ë víi ai


(to) stay for ( aweek/a day): ë bao nhiêu ngày
my uncle (example): chú ,bác tôi


my aunt (example): cô, dì tôi
(to ) visit ( translation): thăm


T uses the techniques to elicit each word


T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat
in chorus and then individually


T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and
stress


T asks Ss to copy



<b>Check : Ordering vocabulary A 1 p 140</b>
<b>-</b>T reads the text aloud


Answer keys :


Listen and repeat in choral, in
groups, in individually


Then copy down on their
notebooks


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(173)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=173>

1 the summer vacation 4(to) stay for ( aweek/a
day


6 the citadel 6 my uncle


3 (to) stay with someone 5 my aunt 2 (to )
visit


Presentation dialogue : A1 P 140


<b>-</b>Reads the text , then asks Ss to practice the text
<b>- </b>Then asks some questions


Answer keys :


Visit Hue , with her aunt and uncle, one a week ,
visit the citadel



<b>Model sentences </b>:


What are you going to do ?


I'm going to visit Hue


She's stay for a week
<b>2.Practice:</b>


<b>Work Cue Dril</b>l<b>:</b>


<b>Asks Ss to make questions follwing example </b>
<b>exchange :</b>


<b>S1: What are you going do this summer ?</b>
<b>S2: I'm going to visit [Hue ]</b>


3 Further practice :
Find S.O who


<b>-Asks Ss to play the game following example </b>
<b>exchange :</b>


<b>S1: This summer vacation , are you going to </b>
<b>[ stay at home ] ?</b>


<b>S2: Yes,I"m / No, I'm not </b>
<b>Find someone who is going to</b>
<b> Name </b>



<b>,, stay at home</b>


<b>... visit an aunt or uncle </b>


<b>... visit a new city</b>


<b>...stay in a hotel</b>


<b>.. camp in the mountais</b>


Listen and practice the text
Work in individually
answers questions


<b>Copy down the form</b>


<b>Work in pairs to answer</b>
<b>following example exchange :</b>


<b>S1: What are you going do this </b>
<b>summer ?</b>


S2: I'm going to visit [Hue ]


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(174)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=174>

<b>..stay in a tent </b>
<b>2007</b>


<b>IV Consolidation:</b>
<b>V, Homework:</b>



13 Do ex 1,2 P 114
14 Prepare Lesson 2 A4-5


<b>Date: 29/3/</b>
<b> Period 85</b>


<b>Unit 14 : making plans </b>


<b> </b>

Lesson2 : A4-5 P 142-143



<b>A Objective</b>:


By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the details text and practice ‘’going
to ‘’ future and sequencing words: first, then, next, after that, finally.


<b>I</b>.<b>Knowledges :</b> ’going to ‘’ future and sequencing words: first, then, next, after
that, finally.


<b> II. Skill</b>: Speaking


<b> III. Preparation</b> : Book, board, lesson plan, spare table.
<b>B. Procedures :</b>


<b> I. Settlement</b>
<b>II.Checking : </b>
. <b> III. New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>1. Pre- reading</b>



<b>Pre-teach</b>


- The beach (example )
- A temple ( picture)


T uses the techniques to elicit each word


T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus
and then individually


T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy


<b>Check : Matching </b>


Asks Ss to match the word in the column A with the word in
the column B


A B
Ha long bay


Hue


Ben thanh market
Nha trang
The beach
HCM city





-Ss listen and repeat in
chorus and then
individually


Ss copy down on their
notebook


Work in groups to
play this game


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(175)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=175>

The citadel
Quang ninh
Ngoc son temple


Ha noi
Ordering :


-T says : Phuong and Mai are going to visit the five places
you’ve matched in the summer vacation


<b>1 2 3 4 5</b>
<b>2. While </b>–<b>reading :</b>


<b> A4 - P 142</b>


-Reads the text , then asks Ss to practice the text ,
-Asks Ss to read the text to check their order the places
then asks Ss to fill in the correct order in the column one of
the gird below with answer keys



Places to visit
Where to stay
How long
What to do
First


Then
Next
After that
finally
Ha long
Ha noi
Hue
Nha trang
HCM


<b>4. Post reading :</b>


<b>TRansformation writing:</b>


<b>-</b>Asks Ss to change information from the text on P.142 change
Phuong and Mai to “ I” and replacecing their vacation plan
with the student’s own plans


<b>Keys</b> : I ...


Read the text to check
their order the places
and practice the text
Then fill in the


correct order in the
column one of the
gird below in
individually


Work in individually
to change information
from the text on
P.142 change Phuong
and Mai to “ I” and
replacecing their
vacation plan with the
student’s own plans


<b>IV. Consolidation</b>:


 Asks Ss to write vocabulary.
<b>V. Homework:</b>


 Prepare Unit 14 Lesson 2


 Do ex 3 P 114 (work book)
<b>Date: 29/3/2007</b>


<b> Period 86</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(176)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=176>

<b> </b>

Lesson3 :B1--4 P 144-145



<b>A Objective</b>:



By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further speaking to talk about plans for the near
future


<b>I</b>.<b>Knowledges :</b> ‘’going to ‘’ future
<b> II. Skill</b>: Speaking


<b> III. Preparation</b> : Book, board, lesson plan,.
<b>B. Procedures :</b>


<b> I. Settlement</b>
<b>II.Checking : </b>
<b> . </b> III. New lesson:


Teacher’s activities <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1.Review </b>


<b>Finding friends :(</b>with answer keys<b> )</b>


Asks Ss to complete the table following example exchange :
S1: What are you going to do tomorrow?


S2: I’m going to [do my homework]


homework
My friend
A soocer match
A movie


badminton


My mon
walking


See







Play




Do




Work in individually
to complete the table
following example
exchange :


S1: What are you
going to do
tomorrow?


S2: I’m going to [do
my homework



Work in pairs to
predict the dialogue


Ss copy down the
dialogue and Then fill
in the gaps in pairs
then practice the dia
in pairs


Work in groups to
play this game


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(177)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=177>

Visit





Help




Go




watch






<b>2 Practice :</b>
Predict dialogue :


-Asks Ss to predict the dialogue


Tuan: What are you going to do tonight?
Lan: I;m going to ...


Tuan : What are you going to do tomorrow ?


Lan: It’s Sunday .I’m going to ...Then we’re going
to ...what about you?


Tuan : Tonight , I’m going to ... tomorrow, I’m going to...
Mapped dialogue


B2 P 144


-Asks Ss to make the dialogue
<b>Example exchange :</b>


.... tonight ? ...see a movie
. . ... tonight ?
...help my Mom


...tomorrow? ... go walking
. ...tomorrow?
..play volleyball


S1: What are you going to do tonight ?



S2: I;m going to see a movie .What are you going to do tonight ?
S1: I;m going to help my mom .What are you going to ?


S2: ect...
<b>4.Chain game :</b>


<b>-</b>Asks Ss to practice in pairs ,using the sentences
<b>Example exchange :</b>


S1: On Sunday morning I’m going to go shopping


S2: On Sunday morning I’m going to go shopping and on Sunday
afternoon I’m going watch TV.


morning I’m going to
go shopping


S2: On Sunday


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(178)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=178>

<b>IV. Consolidation</b>:


 The form ‘going to ‘’.
<b>V. Homework:</b>


 Prepare Unit 14 Lesson 4


 Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work bo


<b>Date : 5 /4/2007</b>



Period 87


Unit14 <b>making plans</b>


<b> </b>

<b>Lesson 4 B5-6 (*P. 145-146)</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


<b> </b>By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further listening and reading practice with
'going to<b> ' </b>


<b>I Knowledges</b>: ''going to ''.
<b>II Skills:</b> reading and listening
<b>III Preperation: </b>


Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book


<b>B.Procedures</b>:


<b>I,Settlement </b>Greeting


Check attandence
<b> II,Checking</b>. Check the form


What are you going to do tomorrow?
<b> </b>III,New lesson:


<b>Teacher's activities</b>

<b>Students' activities</b>
-1<b> Review :</b>


<b>Survey </b>


<b>-</b>Asks Ss to practice the structure
<b> </b>What are you going to do ....
name


tonight
On Sunday
On Saturday


In the summer vacation
me


<b>2 Pre -reading </b>
<b>*</b>Pre -teach:


(to ) bring ( translation): mang
(to ) take a photo (mime): chơp ¶nh
a camera ( picture/ realia): máy ảnh
T uses the techniques to elicit each word


T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus
and then individually


Work in pairs to practice
the structure


<b> </b>What are you going to
do ?



Listen and repeat in
choral, in groups, in
individually


Then copy down on their
notebooks


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(179)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=179>

T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy


<b>Check : what and where</b>


Bring take a photo a camera
Pre questions


<b>-</b>T says : Minh and his friends are going to have a picnic
1 Where are they going to ?


2 What three things are they going to bring ?
3 What are they going to there?


3 While -reading :


_T reads the text ,asks Ss to read to check their prediction
Answer keys :


1 .near a lake 2 .a camera , food and drink 3. take a photos
4 Pre-listening:



Brainstorm


Things to bring for
a camping vacation


-Then asks Ss to predict these things Vui,Ly ,Lan,Mai and Nga
bring


Vui a ball
Ly a camera
Lan some food
Mai some drink
Nga a tent


5 While-listening :
B6 P.145


<b>-</b>Asks Ss to listen to the tape to check their prediction
Answer keys :


Vui: a tent ,some food
Ly : a camera


Lan : a ball


Mai and Nga : some drink
:


Work in individually to
these answer questions



Listen and check their
prediction ,then practice
the text


Work in individually
To write vocabulary
A tent ,a kite , food ....


Then predict these things
Vui,Ly ,Lan,Mai and Nga
bring


Work in pairs to listen to
the tape to check their
prediction


<b>IV Consolidation:</b>
<b>V, Homework:</b>


15 Do ex 3,4 P 115
16 Prepare Lesson 5


<b>Date : 5 /4/2007</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(180)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=180>

Unit14 <b>making plans</b>


<b> </b>

<b>Lesson 5: C1-3 (*P. 147)</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:



<b> </b>By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to make suggestions with ‘Let’s..’’ and respond,
further practice in ‘want to (do)<b> ' </b>


<b>I Knowledges</b>: '‘Let’s..’’ ‘want to (do) ' .
<b>II Skills:</b> Speaking


<b>III Preperation: </b>


Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book


<b>B.Procedures</b>:


<b>I,Settlement </b>Greeting


Check attandence


<b> II,Checking</b>. AsksSs to write vocabulary
<b> </b>III,New lesson:


<b>Teacher's activities</b>

<b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1 Presentation :</b>


<b>*</b>Pre -teach:


by minibus ( example) : b»ng xe buýt nhá
a pagoda ( picture): chïa


too ( synonym very ) : rÊt
too far ( example ) : rÊt xa



T uses the techniques to elicit each word


T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in chorus
and then individually


T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy


<b>Check : ROR</b>


by minibus a pagoda too far
<b>Pre questions </b>


<b>-T says : </b>Ba,Lan and Nam are going to have a picnic
1 Where are they going to go ?


2 How are they going to travel?
Presentation dialogue


_T reads the dialogue ,asks Ss to check their prediction
<b>Answer keys</b> :


1 Huong pagoda 2 by minibus


_Asks Ss to answer the questions C2 P .148 in the text book
<b>Answer keys :</b>


a Nam wants to go to Hue



b Nga wants to go to Huong pagoda
c Lan wants to walk


d Because it’s too far
e By bike


Listen and repeat in
choral, in groups, in
individually


Then copy down on their
notebooks


Work in groups tp play
this game


Work in individually to
answer these questions
by predicting


Listen and check their
prediction ,then practice
the dialogue


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(181)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=181>

f Because it’s too hot


g Ba wants to travel by minibus


 Model sentences :



-17Let’s go camping
Walk there
-18That’s a good idea
-19No,I dont’ want to
<b>2 Practice : Picture drill </b>


<b> </b>C3 a-f P.148-149 with work cue Yes/no


Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange
S1: Let’s go to the beach


S2: That’s a good idea/ No I dont’ want to
<b>3 Production :</b>


<b>Mapped dialogue </b>


<i>You Your friend </i>


See a movie no..go to the beach
No...too hot


Go to the museun Yes ...walk
No..go by minibus Yes


Listen and copy down


Work in pairs to practice
the structure following
example exchange



S1: Let’s go to the beach
S2: That’s a good idea/
No I dont’ want to


Work in pairs to make the
dialogue


<b>IV Consolidation:</b>
<b>V, Homework:</b>


20 Do ex 5 P 115
21 Prepare Lesson 6


<b>Date : 5 /4/2007</b>


<b> Period 89 </b>


Unit14 <b>making plans</b>


<b> </b>

<b>Lesson 6: Grammar practice (*P. 150-153)</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


<b> </b>By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to further practice in Present simple,Adv of
frequency,Present progressive ,’going to ‘’ future and the weather


<b>I Knowledges</b>: Present simple,Adv of frequency.


Present progressive ,’going to ‘’ future and the weather .
<b>II Skills:</b> Speaking and writing



<b>III Preperation: </b>


Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book


<b>B.Procedures</b>:


<b>I,Settlement </b>Greeting


Check attandence


<b> II,Checking</b>. AsksSs to write vocabulary
<b> </b>III,New lesson:


<b>Teacher's activities</b>

<b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1 Present simple:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(182)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=182>

Asks Ss to practice the structure following example exchange
S1: What sports do you like ?


S2: Football


S1: What sports don’t you like ?
S2: swimming


Like....  ...don’t like...
Name


Sports
 


Season


 


Food


 


Drink


 


Ha


Football 
Swimming


-Asks Ss to write it up following example exchange
Ha likes football but she doesn’t like swimming
2 <b>Adv of frequency:</b>


Asks Ss to play the game STB


Lu«n lu«n kh«ng bao giê thØnh tho¶ng
hai lần một tuần thờng xuyên một lần trong năm


Work in pairs to practice the
structure following example
exchange



S1: What sports do you like ?
S2: Football


S1: What sports don’t you like
?


S2: swimming


Work in individually to write
it upfollowing example
exchange


Ha likes football but she
doesn’t like swimming
Work in groups to play this
game


Work in groups to play this
game following example
exchange


S!: How often do you [go to
the movie ]?


S2 : Twice a week


Work in pairs to practice the
structure following example
exchange



S1:What are you going to do ?
S2 : I’m going to [ play


football ]


Work in pairs to practice the
structure following example
exchange


S1 : Hung usually[ gets up at 6
]


S2: That’s right but today he is
] [getting up at 7]


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(183)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=183>

<b>3</b>

<b>Grammar practice :</b>



Asks Ss to play the game noughts and crosses following
example exchange


S!: How often do you [go to the movie ]?
S2 : Twice a week


TV? The movies ? the store?
Swimming ? your mom? Fishing?
Table tennis? Caping ? badmonton ?
<b>4 Future going to :</b>‘ ‘’


<b>Picture drill 4 P.151-152 </b>



-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange


S1! What are you going to do ?
S2 : I’m going to [ play football
5 <b>Present progressive :</b>


-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange


S1 : Hung usually[ gets up at 6 ]


S2: That’s right but today he is ] [getting up at 7]
a. get up at 6/get up at 7


b. go to school/ go camping


c. have rice for lunch/ have a picnic
<b>6 future plans and the weather </b>
<b>-</b>Asks Ss to answer the questions
1 Where are you going to do ?
2 Who are you going to with ?


3 What season are you going to go in?
4 What ‘s the weather like then?


5 What are you going to bring with you ?


<b>Example : </b>I’m going to go to Sapa with my friends. We are
going to in the spring .It’s cool but we like cool weather ...



the questions then write a
pharagraph


<b>IV Consolidation:</b>


Present simple,Adv of frequency.


Present progressive ,’going to ‘’ future and the weather
<b>V, Homework:</b>


<b>22</b> Prepare unit 15 Lesson
<b>Date : 10 /4/2007</b>


<b> Period 90 </b>

<b>45 minute test</b>



A. <b>Objectives</b>: By the end of the lesson , T can check Ss’ understanding and help Ss
review the structures they’ve learned


<b>I . Knowledge</b>: vocab and structures in unit 12-14
<b>II. Skills</b> : writing


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(184)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=184>

<b>I Choose a,b,c or d to complete the sentences (4ms) </b>


1, How ...do you go to the zoo ? Twice a week. a, often b, long c,old d, many
2, She ...sports . a ,likes b, like c, is liking d, liked
3, They ...playing soccer. a, is b, are c, am d, going
4, I’m going to stay.... a week . a, in b, at c, from d, for


5, ....is the weather like in Hue? a, when b, what c, where d, how


6, Let’s ...to the cinema . a, go b, going c, goes d, to go
7, How ...is the cake ? a , long b, much c, many d, often
8, He ...TV at the moment a ,watches b, watch c, watching d, is
watching


<b>II Put the verb in the correct tense ( 1 m)</b>
1, We...(play) volleyball now.


2, This summer vacation, Hoa ...(be) going to visit Ngoc Son temple.
3, How ...Lan...(travel) to school?


4, I usually ...(go ) camping in the summer .


<b>III Match the questions in colum A with the answer in the colum B (3ms):</b>
A B


1 How often do you go fishing ? a , He watches TV
2, What weather does she like? b , I’d like some milk .
3, What does Ba do when it’s cold ? c, Once a week


4, What does he do in the morning d, She likes cool weather
5, What would you like? e, Two kilos


6, How much rice do you want? f, He plays tennis when it’s cold
<b>IV Read the passage andwrite T(true ) and F (False) (1 m):</b>


Nga is a teacher,so she is free in the summer. She’s going on vacation this summer. First, she is
going to visit Ha long bay. She is going to stay in a hotel for two days. Then she is going to visit
Da lat for three days. Finally she is going to visit some friends in Ho Chi Minh city.They are
going to walk along Sai gon river . She is going to travel by coach.



1, She is going to visit Ha long bay first, then Ho Chi Minh city and finally in Da lat.
2, She is going to travel by coach.


3, She is going to visit Da lat for three days.


4, She is going to visit her uncle in Ho Chi Minh city.
<b>V Write 5 adv of frequency (1m)</b>


<b>...</b>
...


<b>45 minute test</b>



<b>Student</b>’<b>s name : </b>...
<b>Class</b> : 6


<b>Mark Teacher</b>’<b>s mark</b>
<b>I Choose a,b,c or d to complete the sentences (4ms) </b>


1, How ...do you go to the zoo ? Twice a week. a, often b, long c,old d, many
2, She ...sports . a ,likes b, like c, is liking d, liked
3, They ...playing soccer. a, is b, are c, am d, going
4, I’m going to stay.... a week . a, in b, at c, from d, for


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(185)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=185>

watching


<b>II Put the verb in the correct tense ( 1 m)</b>
1, We...(play) volleyball now.



2, This summer vacation, Hoa ...(be) going to visit Ngoc Son temple.
3, How ... ...Lan...(travel) to school?


4, I usually ...(go ) camping in the summer .


<b>III Match the questions in colum A with the answer in the colum B (3ms):</b>
A B


1 How often do you go fishing ? a , He watches TV
2, What weather does she like? b , I’d like some milk .
3, What does Ba do when it’s cold ? c, Once a week


4, What does he do in the morning d, She likes cool weather
5, What would you like? e, Two kilos


6, How much rice do you want? f, He plays tennis when it’s cold
<b>IV Read the passage andwrite T(true ) and F (False) (1 m):</b>


Nga is a teacher, so she is free in the summer. She’s going on vacation this summer. First, she is
going to visit Ha long bay. She is going to stay in a hotel for two days. Then she is going to visit
Da lat for three days. Finally she is going to visit some friends in Ho Chi Minh city.They are
going to walk along Sai gon river . She is going to travel by coach.


1, She is going to visit Ha long bay first, then Ho Chi Minh city and finally in Da lat.
2, She is going to travel by coach.


3, She is going to visit Da Lat for three days.


4, She is going to visit her uncle in Ho Chi Minh city.
<b>V Write 5 adv of frequency (1m)</b>



<b>...</b>
<b>.</b>


<b>Date: 19/4/2007</b>
<b> Period 92</b>


<b>Unit 15 : countries</b>


<b> </b>

Lesson 3 :A5 P 156



<b>A Objective</b>:


By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to write a post card about being on vacation


<b>I</b>.<b>Knowledges :</b> Countries, nationalities and languages vocabulary<b> </b>
<b>II. Skill</b>: writing


<b> III. Preparation</b> : Book, board, lesson plan,.
<b>B. Procedures :</b>


<b>I.</b> <b>Settlement</b>


Greeting
Check attandence


<b>II.Checking : </b>
<b> . </b> III. New lesson:


Teacher’s activities <b>Students activities</b>’



<b>1 Revision :</b>
<b>Work cue drill:</b>


<b>-</b>Asks Ss to pratice the structure following example
exchange :


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(186)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=186>

S1: Where is Hoa from ?
S2: She is from Viet nam


S1: What language does she speak ?
S2 : She speaks Viet namese .


a. Hoa/Viet nam
b. Tomiko/ Japan
c. Jo/ Australia
d. John/ Britain
<b>e.</b> Susan/ Canada
<b>2.Pre-writing :</b>
<b>Pre-teach:</b>


A post card (real):


(to )be on vacation (Example ):
wet (example) :


a lot of (synonym: many):
interesting places (example):


T uses the techniques to elicit each word



T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus and then individually


T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy


Check: What and where


be on vacation wet interesting places
a lot of


<b>-</b>Asks Ss to read the text to answer the questions (with
answer keys a. Who is the post card from ? ( Nhan)
b. Where is he ? ( in london)


c. What is the weather like? (cool and wet
d. Is he travelling by train ? ( no,by bus )
e. Who’s the postcard to ? ( Minh )


 Matching


-Asks Ss to put the words into three columns (with answer
keys)


Country City interesting places
Japan Tokyo Mount Fujiama
Viet nam Hue The citadel
The USA New york The statue of Liberty
China Beijing The great wall


<b>2 While-writing :</b>


Transformation writing”
-Asks Ss to write


3 Post –wrting :
Exhibition


-T corrects their mistakes


example exchange :
S1: Where is Hoa from ?
S2: She is from Viet nam
S1: What language does
she speak ?


S2 : She speaks Viet
namese .


Ss listen and repeat in
chorus and then
individually


Ss copy down on their
notebook


Work in groups to play
this game


Work in pairs to read the


text to answer the


questions (with answer
keys


Work in individually to
put the words into three
columns


Work in groups to write
Stick their poster on the
board to correct each
other


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(187)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=187>

 Vocabulary
<b>V. Homework:</b>


 Prepare Unit 15 Lesson34


 Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work book)


<b>Date : 20 /4/2007</b>


Period 93
Unit15 <b>countries </b>


<b> </b>

<b>Lesson 3: B1 P. 158</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


<b> </b>By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to compare places ,using the comparative and


superrlative adj of one syllable.


<b> I Knowledges: </b>comparative and superrlative adj of one syllable.
<b>II Skills:</b> Speaking


<b>III Preperation: </b>


Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book


<b>B.Procedures</b>:


<b>I,Settlement </b>Greeting


Check attandence


<b> II,Checking</b>. Asks Ss to write vocabulary
<b>III,New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b>

<b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1 Revision: Matching</b>


<b>-</b>Asks Ss to choose the adjs which best describe the cities
(a city can have more than one adj


hot Hue
wet HCM city
cold Hoi an
big Sapa
small Ha noi


<b> </b>long xuyen
<b>2 Presentation :</b>


<b>Presentation Text </b>


-Reads the text, asks Ss to practice
<b>Models :</b>


1: Adj + er : smaller, cloder
2: Adj +est : smallest. clodest
<b>Note:</b>


Double last letter +er : thinner, bigger
<b>3 Practice: word cue drill</b>


-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange


S1 : Hanoi is bigger than Da nang


Work in individually to
choose the adjs which best
describe the cities (a city can
have more than one adj )


Listen and copy down the
models


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(188)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=188>

S2: But HCM city is the biggest



a. Da nang Ha noi HCM city (big)
b. Ha noi Uong bi Sapa (clod )
c. Vinh Long xuyen Hoi an (small)
d. Ha noi Can tho Hue ( wet)
<b>4 Further practice : Answer given</b>


_T gives the answer asks Ss to make questions with
answer keys


a. Phanxipang What’s the tallest mountain in Viet nam?
b.The Mekong What’s the biggest river in Viet nam?


c. Hue What’s the wettest city in Viet nam?
d. Sapa Whast’s the clodest town in Viet nam?
e. HCM city What’s the biggest city in Viet nam?
<b>-</b>Asks Ss to play Noughts and crosses by comparing their
home town with towm in the box


Ha noi Hue Sapa
HCM city Da nang Hoi an
Hai phong Can tho Da lat


S1 : Hanoi is bigger than Da
nang


S2: But HCM city is the
biggest


Work in pairs to make
questions



Work in groups to play game
Example :


Ha noi is bigger than Quang
tri


<b>IV Consolidation:</b>
Check the models


<b>V, Homework:</b>


23 Do ex 1,2 P 129
24 Prepare Lesson 4
<b>Date : 20 /4/2007</b>


Period 94


Unit15 <b>countries </b>


<b> </b>

<b>Lesson 4: B2-5 P. 159-161</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


<b> </b>By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to read facts about famous places in the world
and practice comparatives


<b> I Knowledges: </b>comparative .
<b>II Skills:</b> Reading and Speaking
<b>III Preperation: </b>



Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book


<b>B.Procedures</b>:


<b>I,Settlement </b>Greeting


Check attandence


<b> II,Checking</b>. Asks Ss to write the sentences from the cue words
Ha noi / small/ Hcm city


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(189)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=189>

<b>Teacher's activities</b>

<b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1 Revision: Lucky numbers </b>


<b>-</b>Asks Ss to play this game by asking and answering
questions


1. What’s the biggest city in Viet nam ? (HCM )
<b>2.</b> What’s the biggest city in Britain? (Lon don)
<b>3.</b> What’s the biggest city in Japan ? ( Tokyo)
<b>4.</b> LN


<b>5.</b> What’s the tallest mountain you know?
<b>6.</b> LN


<b>7.</b> What’s the wettest you know?


<b>8.</b> Which one ‘s colder : Can tho or Sapa?
<b>2 Pre-reading :</b>



<b>*</b>Pre -teach:


high (example) : cao
long (mime) : dµi
thick (example): dµy
over


a million (translation) : mét triÖu


-T uses the techniques to elicit each word


-T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat
in chorus and then individually


-T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
-T asks Ss to copy


<b>Check :</b> Wordsquare
_Asks Ss to find out the words


W
E
T
B
I
G
C
T
H


I
C
K
L
O
N
G
E
R
L


Work in groups to play this
game


1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5


Listen and repeat in choral, in
groups, in individually


Then copy down on their
notebooks


Work in groups to find out


the words


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(190)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=190>

V
O
L
D
X
A
E
D
L
O
C
T
R
H
I
G
H
Keys :




wet, big, thick, long, longer, old, high




over,big, do, no


 cool  tall  cold


Odering:


_Asks Ss to put the cities in order : biggest first
HCM, LONDON, TOKYO, HANOI, MEXICO.
<b>3While-reading :B2 P.159</b>


-Asks Ss to read the text to check their order
<b>Keys : </b>


1-MEXICO, 2-TOKYO,3-LONDON, 4-HCM,
5-HANOI -Asks Ss to answer the questions in B2 P.159
Answer Keys <b>: </b>


a.No,it is not
b.It’s MEXICO


c. Tokyo is bigger than London


<b>4 Post -reading : guess from the cotext</b>


-Asks Ss to look at the text and pictures to guess the
meaning of


1 a population 2 the capital city 3 a building
4 kilometers 5 meters 6 a structure


_


first



Work in individually to
answer the questions in B2
P.159


Work in individuallylook at
the text to guess the meaning
of


1 a population 2 the capital
city 3 a building


4 kilometers 5 meters
6 a structure


<b>IV Consolidation:</b>


Check vocabulary
<b>V, Homework:</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(191)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=191>

<b>Date : 20 /4/2007</b>


Period 95


Unit15 <b>countries </b>


<b> </b>

<b>Lesson 5: C1-2 P. 162-164</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


<b> </b>By the end of this lesson Ss will be describe Viet nam use “ lots of...” as a quantitier
<b> I Knowledges: </b>Lots of , Geography vocabulary .



<b>II Skills:</b> Speaking and writing
<b>III Preperation: </b>


Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book


<b>B.Procedures</b>:


<b>I,Settlement </b>Greeting


Check attandence


<b> II,Checking</b>. Asks Ss to write vocabulary
<b>III,New lesson:</b>


<b>Teacher's activities</b>

<b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1 Revision: Slap the board </b>


<b>-</b>Asks Ss to play this game by listening and slapping in
the words


beautiful green rivers lakes


beaches fields
mountains


<b>2 Presentation :</b>
<b>*</b>Pre -teach:



a forest (picture): c¸nh rõng
a desert ( translation): sa m¹c
(to ) rain ( picture ): ma


great (a) (example): vĩ đại ,to lớn
lots of ( synonym: alot of ,many) : nhiều
-T uses the techniques to elicit each word


-T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat
in chorus and then individually


-T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
-T asks Ss to copy


<b>Check :</b> R.O.R


-Asks Ss to read the text to answer the question
What are the 6 ‘natural features’ Lan tells us about ?
<b>Keys : </b>


<b> 1 </b>mountains 4 rain
2 rivers 5 forest


Work in groups to play this
game


Listen and repeat in choral,
in groups, in individually
Then copy down on their


notebooks


Work in groups to play this
game


Work in individually to read
the text to answer the


question


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(192)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=192>

3 lakes 6 forest
<b>Model sentences :</b>


We have lots of mountains, rivers, forests.
Rain.


<b>3 Practice : Picture drill </b> C2 P.164


-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange :


S1 : Does Viet nam have lots of [ mountains ] ?
S2: Yes, it does .


T/F repetition drill:


-Asks Ss to listen and repeat if the sentences which T
reads is right and keep silent if it wrong


Example :



T : There are lots of beaches in Da nang
<b> </b>There are lots of forests in Ha noi
There are lots of lakes in Ha noi
<b>4 Production : Noughts and Crosses</b>


<b>-Asks Ss to </b>practice the structure following example
exchange :


S1: Are there any[ forests] in Viet nam?
S2: Yes/ No, there are.


Mountains rivers forests


Beaches rain building


Trees interesting places lakes


features’ Lan tells us about ?’'
Listen and copy down it
Work in pairsto practice the
structure following example
exchange :


S1 : Does Viet nam have lots
of [ mountains ] ?


S2: Yes, it does .



Listen and repeat if the
sentences which T reads is
right and keep silent if it
wrong


Repeat
silent
Repeat


Work in pairs topractice the
structure following example
exchange :


S1: Are there any[ forests] in
Viet nam?


S2: Yes/ No, there are.


<b>IV Consolidation:</b>


Check vocabulary and the structure have lots of + nouns
<b>V, Homework:</b>


27 Do ex 1,2 P.130
28 Prepare Lesson 6


<b>Date : 20 /4/2007</b>


Period 96



Unit15 <b>countries </b>


<b> </b>

<b>Lesson 6: C3 P. 165</b>


<b>A.Objectives</b>:


<b> </b>By the end of this lesson Ss will be understand the text about the world’s great rives and
mountains to skim for details and get further practice in using comparatives and


superlatives


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(193)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=193>

<b>II Skills:</b> Reading
<b>III Preperation: </b>


Teacher: Lesson plan , pictures
Students: Book


<b>B.Procedures</b>:


<b>I,Settlement </b>Greeting


Check attandence


<b> II,Checking</b>. Asks Ss to write sentences with the cue words
Viet nam /have /lots of/ rain


<b> </b>III,New lesson:


<b>Teacher's activities</b>

<b>Students' activities</b>
<b>1 Revision: Wordsquare</b>


<b>-</b>Asks Ss to find out the words in the box
R


I
V
E
R
S
W


C
M


S
T
A
R
T
S
H
E
L
B
E
A
C
H
I
T


R
E
E
I
G


I
N
E


Work in individually to find
out the words


Listen and repeat in choral,
in groups, and in


individually


Then copy down on their
notebooks


Work in groups to play this
game


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(194)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=194>

I
R
O
N
E
G


A
R
G
L
O
T
S
H
I
S
D
L
R
O
W


X
F
<b>Answer keys :</b>


 great, long  world  girl




meters, rain, high, China, of, or




river, rivers starts, beach, tree, in, lots , on
<b>2 Pre-reading:</b>



<b>*Pre -teach:</b>


the sea (picture): biÓn


Tibet ( translation): tây tạng
(to ) flow to ( mime): chả
North Afica: b¾c mü


-T uses the techniques to elicit each word


-T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat
in chorus and then individually


-T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
-T asks Ss to copy


<b>Check :</b> What and Where


the sea Tibet North Afica
<b>T/ F predictions:</b>


-Asks Ss to predict these sentences are T or F
1<b>. </b>There are two great rivers in viet nam.


2 The Red river is longer than the Mekong river .
3 The Red river and the Mekong both start in China


Work in pairsto read the text


to check their predictions and
then read the text again to
answer the question in the
text book


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(195)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=195>

4 The longest river in the world os not in Viet nam
5 Phanxipang is the hightest mountain in the world
<b>3While -reading : C3 p.165</b>


-Asks Ss to read the text to check their prediction s
<b>Answer keys </b>: 1T 2F 3F 4 T 5 F


-Asks Ss to read the text again to answer the question
in the text book C3 P. 165


<b>Answer keys </b>


a.The Mekong river


b. The Mekong starts in Tibet


c. The Nile river is the longest in the world


d. The Nile river flow to the Mediterrrannean sea
E Moun Everest is the highest mountain in the world
f Phanxipang is the highest mountain in Viet nam
<b>4 Post-reading : Lucky number</b>


-Asks Ss to play this game by amswering these
questions .



a. LN


b. What are the two great rivers in Viet nam ?
c. Where does the Red river start ?


d. LN


e. What does the Red river flow to ?
f. W hat does the Nile start and flow to ?
g. LN


h. Make a sentences about the lonhest river in Viet
nam?




<b>IV Consolidation:</b>


Check vocabulary
<b>V, Homework:</b>


29 Do ex 3 P.130


30 Prepare unit 16 Lesson 1


<b>Date: 19/4/2007</b>
<b> Period 97</b>


<b>Unit 16 countries</b>



<b> </b>

Lesson 1 :A1-3 P 166-167



<b>A Objective</b>:


By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to talk about food with countable and uncountable
quantifiers


<b>I</b>.<b>Knowledges :</b> a lot, a little, a few
<b>II. Skill</b>: speaking


<b> III. Preparation</b> : Book, board, lesson plan,.
<b>B. Procedures :</b>


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(196)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=196>

Teacher’s activities <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>1 Revision :</b>


<b>Jumble Words:</b>


<b>-</b>Asks Ss to rewrite the words in the order


toespota <b>= </b>potatoes , gegs = eggs , werflos = flowers
motatoes = tomatoes , icer = ucer , nonios = onions
tableveges = vegetables


<b>2.Presentation :</b>


<b>Presentation text : A1 p.166</b>


<b>-</b>Reads the text, asks Ss to listen to the text and practice the


text


Model sentences :


a. How much rice is there ?
<b> </b>There is some


<b> </b>A lot of


<b> </b>A little rice
b. How many eggs are there ?


There are some


Alot of eggs
A few


<b>3 Practice : Matching A3 P.167</b>


- Asks Ss to match the sentences to the
<b>Answer keys</b> : 1 d 2 f 3 b 4 a 5 c 6 e


<b>Picture drill</b>:


A1 p.166 and A3 P.167


-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange :


S 1: How much rice is there?


S2: There is alot/ lots


S1: How many onions are there ?
S2 : There are a few


<b>4 Production</b> :


Chain game :
-Asks Ss to play chain game


Example : S1 : There is a little rice


S2 : There is a little rice, and some tomatoes
S3 : There is a little rice, some tomatoes and a
few eggs


Work in groups to
rewrite the words in
the order


Ss listen , and practice
the text ,then give
examples


Ss copy down on their
notebook


Work in pairs to match


Work in pairs to to


practice the structure
following example
exchange :


S1: How much ricwe is
there?


S2: There is alot/ lots
S1: How many onions
are there ?


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(197)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=197>

<b>IV. Consolidation</b>:


 Vocabulary
<b>V. Homework:</b>


 Prepare Unit 15 Lesson34


 Do ex 1,2 P 115-116 (work book)


<b>Date: 19/4/2007</b>
<b> Period 98</b>


<b>Unit 16 MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT</b>


<b> </b>

Lesson 2 :A2 P 166-167



<b>A Objective</b>:


By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the main and details ideas of the text


about farming and getting further practice in alot, alittle, a few


<b>I</b>.<b>Knowledges :</b> a lot, a little, a few
<b> II. Skill</b>: reading


<b> III. Preparation</b> : Book, board, lesson plan,.
<b>B. Procedures :</b>


<b>I.</b> <b>Settlement</b>
<b> </b>Greeting


Check attandence
<b>II.Checking : </b>


<b> . </b> III. New lesson:


Teacher’s activities <b>Students activities</b>’


<b>1 Revision :</b>


<b>Noughts and crosses :</b>


<b>-</b>Asks Ss to play the game ,use ''There [is a little rice]''
a dozen eggs two potatoes 1/2 a glass of milk
1/2 kilo onions 100 g rice 4 kilos vegetables
1 kilo fruit 2 tomatoes 2 flowers
<b>2.Pre-reading :</b>


<b>Pre-teach</b>



animals (picture):
a buffalow (picture):
a cow (picture):
( to ) flow (picture):
(to ) pull a cart (picture):
(to ) grow (picture):
(to ) procedure (picture):


<b>-</b> T uses the techniques to elicit each word


T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus and then individually


T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress


Work in groups to play the
game ,use ''There [is a little
rice]''


Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and then individually


Ss copy down on their
notebook


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(198)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=198>

T asks Ss to copy
Check: Net work


animals


grow on the farm


fruit / rice / vegetables procedure
*<b>open -prediction </b>:


-Asks Ss to predict 6 things Mr Hai has on his farm and 5
things he has procedures with answer keys


Mr Hai has Mr Hai procedures
1 paddy fields rice


2 a small vegetable field vegetables
3 fruit trees fruit


4 buffalow milk
5 cows eggs
6 chickens


<b>3 While -reading:</b>


-Asks Ss to reads the text to check their predictions.
- asks Ss to read the text again to answer the questions
<b>3 Practice : Matching A3 P.167</b>


- Asks Ss to match the sentences to the picture
<b>Answer keys</b> : 1 d 2 f 3 b 4 a 5 c 6 e


<b>Picture drill</b>:


A1 p.166 and A3 P.167



-Asks Ss to practice the structure following example
exchange :


S 1: How much rice is there?
S2: There is alot/ lots


S1: How many onions are there ?
S2 : There are afew


<b>4 Production</b> :


Chain game :
-Asks Ss to play chain game
Example : S1 : There is a little rice


S2 : There is a little rice, and some tomatoes
S3 : There is a little rice, some tomatoes and a
few eggs


vocab


Work in groups to predict 6
things Mr Hai has on his farm
and 5 things he has procedures


Listen and reads the text to
check their predictions
work in pairs to match the
sentences to the picture


Work in pairs to practice the
structure following example
exchange :


S1: How much rice is there?
S2: There is alot/ lots
S1: How many onions are
there ?


S2 : There are a few


Work in groups to play chain
game


<b>IV. Consolidation</b>:


 Vocabulary
<b>V. Homework:</b>


 Prepare Unit 15 Lesson34


</div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(199)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=199></div>
<span class='text_page_counter'>(200)</span><div class='page_container' data-page=200>

<b>Date: 29/4/2007</b>
<b> Period 99</b>


<b>Unit 16 MAN ANd THE ENVIRONMENT</b>


<b> </b>

Lesson 3 :A4-5 P 168



<b>A Objective</b>:



By the end of this lesson Ss will be able to understand the main and details ideas in terms
of cause and effectof the text about the environment


<b>I</b>.<b>Knowledges :</b> Why ...? Because ...
<b> II. Skill</b>: reading


<b> III. Preparation</b> : Book, board, lesson plan,.
<b>B. Procedures :</b>


II. <b>Settlement </b>Greeting


Check attandence
<b>II.Checking : </b>Asks Ss to write voca


<b> . </b> III. New lesson:


<b>Teacher s activities</b>’ <b>Students activities</b>’
<b>1 Revision :matching </b>


<b>-</b>Asks Ss to match Viet namese with EL words
the population rõng forests


trång


the world nông dân farmer
grow d©n sè fields
con vËt


food thức ăn animals
thÕ giíi



<b>2.Pre-reading :</b>
<b>Pre-teach</b>


land (picture): đất đai
plants(picture): thực vật
( to )burn (picture): đốt cháy
(to ) destroy( translation): phá hu


(to ) cut down (synomyn: grow ): chặt phá
in danger( example): mèi nguy hiÓm
<b>-</b> T uses the techniques to elicit each word


T reads each 3 times and asks Ss to listen and repeat in
chorus and then individually


T writes on board and asks Ss the meaning and stress
T asks Ss to copy


Check: What and where


land plants burn


destroy in danger cut down


 <b>ordering</b>:


Work in groups to match Viet


namese with EL words


Ss listen and repeat in chorus
and then individually


Ss copy down on their
notebook


Work in groups to play this
game


</div>

<!--links-->

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về

Tải bản đầy đủ ngay
×